tieng anh 12 cb tron bo

444
Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng The first term of grade 12 The 1 st period Date: 20/8/ 2008 Grade 12 Theme: Guiding how to learn and to do English tests Time: 45 minutes I. Objectives: 1. Educational aim: Students know about English book in grade 12 2. Knowledge: Student know: - How to learn English in grade 12 - How to do English tests - How to use student’s book and workbook 3. Skill : - Reading - Speaking - Listening - Writing - Doing English tests II. Teaching aids: Student’s book, student’s workbook, dictionary, some test papers, tape, cassetteplayer, etc. III. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Notes Warm-up :(7 minutes) - Introduce to students about the teacher - Listen to the teacher Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school 1

Upload: nhumai1893

Post on 05-Apr-2015

223 views

Category:

Documents


9 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng The first term of grade 12

The 1 st period Date: 20/8/ 2008Grade 12

Theme: Guiding how to learn and to do English testsTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students know about English book in grade 122. Knowledge:

Student know: - How to learn English in grade 12- How to do English tests- How to use student’s book and workbook

3. Skill : - Reading- Speaking- Listening- Writing- Doing English tests

II. Teaching aids: Student’s book, student’s workbook, dictionary, some test papers, tape, cassetteplayer, etc.

III. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up :(7 minutes)- Introduce to students about the teacher- Ask students about their names and English knowledge etc.

Guiding: (35 minutes)1. Guiding student’s book and workbook:* Introduce to students how to use their book and workbook

- Listen to the teacher- Answer the teacher’s questions

- put the student’s book and workbook on the table

- listen to the

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

1

Page 2: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng* Introduce to students how to learn reading, speaking, listening, writing, language focus in their books and how to do the exercises in their books2. Guiding English tests in grade 12:* Introduce to students about oral tests, 15 minute tests, 45 minute tests, etc. and how to do them* The tests in grade 12 include: reading : 25%listening: 25%writing: 25%language focus: 25%3. Guiding other books and tape, disc, etc.

Homework: 3 minutes- Ask students to prepare textbook, notebooks and the things for learning andprepare lesson reading - Unit 1

teacher and look through the books

- Listen to the teacher

- listen to the teacher and write down the things which will be prepared at home

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

2

Page 3: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Unit 1 : home lifeThe 2 nd period Date : 21/8Grade 12 Theme: home life Unit 1

Reading Time: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students should know about International

Red Cross 2. Knowledge:

- General knowledge: Students read and guess the meaning of new words from the con text.+ Read the passage and complete the tasks of the lesson.

- Language: Students could understand and use new words after reading- New words: Words related to home life3. Skills: Guessing meaning in context, scanning for specific

information and passage comprehensionII. Method: Integrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Student’s book and pictures, Board, tape, cassetteplayer, chalks, etc.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

3

Page 4: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngIV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Ask students look at the picture and ask some questions- Let students understand more about , house hold chores and family life, today we learn Unit 1- part A: Reading

Before you read : (7 minutes)Ask students to work groups to ask and answer about the pictures - Hang on the blackboard the table of questions. Ask students to work in pairs looking at the pictures to ask and answer them.1. Where is the family?2. What is each member of the family doing?3Is the family happy?Why (not) ?- Introduce the situation of the context- Read the context once to the class.- Show students some new words:+ to be caring+ to be willing to do

+ to be close -knit+ to bemischievous

- Open the book- Listen to the teacher - Look at the picture and answer - Listen to the teacher and open the book – Unit 1, part A: reading

- Work in groups to discuss about the pictures - Work in groups to ask and answer the questions give by the teacher.- Stand up to answer in front of the class P1: Thefamily is at home.P2: The father is playing games with his son and the mother is helping her daughter do homework.P3: Yes, it is.because they look warm and close –knit.

- Look at the book and listen to the teacher- Listen- Note down

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

4

Page 5: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngst

- Help students to summary the main ideas of the context . * The first paragraph: the writer says about the parents’ jobs and the people in her family. * The second paragraph :The writer says about the activities of her parents every day. * The third paragraph: The writer says about her younger brothers and her herself. * The writer says about the happiness in her family.- Ask students to think of their thoughts about a happy family.- Introduce the situation of the passageWhile you read : (23 minutes)- Ask students to look through the passage and read in silence- Help students read the passage- Explain pronunciation and meaning of new words which appear in the passage+ Task 1: (10’)- Ask students to work in groups to read the sentences in the task and then choose the sentence A,B or C that is nearest in meaning to the sentence given.- Read all the sentences which they have chosen loudly to the

- Work in groups and try to repeat the main ideas in each paragraph.

-Practise speaking their ideas freely.

Listen to the teacher

- Work in groups , read the sentences carefully- Listen to the teacher and read up the sentences aloud .

- Note down the new words.

- Read up.- Work in groups to do the task

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

5

Page 6: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngclass

Teach some new words: close –knit (a), mischievous (a), .....

- Ask students to work in groups to do the task.- Call on some students to read the sentences.- Common in whole class + Task 2: (15’)- Divide the whole answers class into 6 groups of 8 students . 1,How busy are the parents in the passage? 2,How caring is the mother ? 3,How do the father and the daughter share the household chore ? 4,What is the daughter attempting to do after secondary school? 5,Why do the children feel they are safe and secure in their family ?- Ask students to read the questions carefully and discuss the answers - Help students to find the paragraph which contain the information for the answers - Call the leader of each group to answer the questions - Ask the whole class to commend - Feedback and give the correct answers and give point.

- Read the passage - Work in groups to find the sum up of the passage

- Present the answers in front of the class - Commend

- Note down the reason of the choice

- Work in groups to ask and answer the questions using the information from the passage

- Some students answer the questions in front of the class

Listen and take notes- Do the home work and prepare for the next lesson.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

6

Page 7: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngAfter you read : (8 minutes)- Ask the whole class to discuss about a happy family.- Call some students to say about their thinking of a happy family

Home work: (2 minutes)- Write about their family or others they know.- Prepare Part B : Speaking at home

The 3 rd Period Date 22/8Grade 12

Theme: Home LifeUnit 1SpeakingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students can talk about their family and other families

+ Students can ask and answer about household chores and family

+ Students discuss their ideas about the true of a happy family2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: By the end of the lesson students can practise a dialogue about a happy family - Language: asking for and giving information from a passage- New words: words related to the topic3. Skills: talking about Home life and their activities in the familyII. Method: integrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: pictures ,textbook,....IV. Procedure: Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

7

Page 8: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (7 minutes)- Playing games.- Divide the class into pairs and ask students to work in pairs to talk about their family in 3 minutes - Call of the leaders of each groups to talk about her/his family in front of the class - Feedback and lead the class to the topic of speaking activities (we are going to discuss about our family )Pre-speaking : (12 minutes)Task 1 Let students read the following sentences and choose which apply to them or their family. - Ask students to work in groups to speak the sentences 1, In my family ,only my father works. 2,Member of my family share the household chores . 3,My responsibility in the family is to wash the dishes. 4, In my family, the interest we share closely is watching football. 5,I often share my personal secrets with my father. 6, I always talk to my parent before making an important decision. - Go around and listen to the

- Keep books close- Listen to the teacher- Work in groups to talk about family

-

-Work in groups and give their ideas why they choose

-Each student stands up and talks about their family.A: In my family ,my parents both go to work,.....................B: In my family, ..........

-Practice speaking out their ideas about their family.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

8

Page 9: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngstudents –Give more suggestions if they need

While-speaking : (15 minutes)

Task 2 - Work in pairs . -Let students ask and answer the questions about their family.

- Listen and give the ideas to each pair.

A: Who works in your family ? B : Both my father and mother. A: Who often does the household chores ? B : My mother mainly does it and sometimes my father help my mother. A :How is your responsibility to your family ? B :I often clean the house and cook the meals when I finish my studying. A : How do the family members

share the interest ? B :We often watch television each other in the evening. A : Who do you often share your secrets with ? B : I often share with my mother.A: Who do you talk to before making an important decision?B: I often talk to my parents.

- All students write some sentences

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

9

Page 10: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Task 3:Work with a different partner. - Ask students to use the questions they have form to ask about her/his family.

- Listen to the students and give remarks.

- Post-speaking : (10 minutes)Task 4- Let the students practise speaking freely about their family.

-Go around to listen and give remarks .- Ask some students to stand up and tell loudly- Listen and correct mistakesHomework: (3 minutes)- Ask students to write a passage about a happy family (80 words)- Ask students to prepare Part C- Listening and do homework

about their family and then stand up to talk.

-Work in groups and each group has a representative to talk about her/his family. P1 : I talked to Tuan . Both his parents go to work. But only his mother does the household chores..... P2 : In Loan’s family ,only her father goes to work and her mother is at home ........... -Work in groups and then speak out their opinions.PS : I think a happy family should have............P : Yes it is . Because every member in the family often share the feelings with each other.........

- Listen to the teacher- Write down the homework

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

10

Page 11: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 4 th period Date : 23/8Grade 12

Theme: Home LifeUnit 1ListeningTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students can listen to get information to decide True or False statements+ Students can improve their ability of listening to write down the main ideals of the lesson.

2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Students learn more about a happy

family- New words: Words related to family3. Skills: - Listening and comprehension questions - Listening and deciding on True or False statements or no informationII. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Student’s book, pictures board, tape,

cassetteplayer, chalks.IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Ask students to close the books- Give some pictures and answer some questions1,Who are they?2 ,What are the relationship among them ?- Check some students and mark- If you want to know more

- Close the books- Listen to the teacher- Work in groups and look at the picture and answer

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

11

Page 12: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngdetails about them we will go to Unit 1- part Listening

Pre-listening: (7 minutes)- Introduce the topic of the listening: In this you will listen to people talk about their friends. But now please talk about your family first. - Ask students to read all the words given carefully and show the difficult words or structures - Explain the words and structures to the class: -reseved : - leftover : - spread out : * Before you listen : - Ask students to look at the picture and say : +What are they doing ? +How many people are there in the family ?

While-listening: (20 minutes)Task 1- Introduction: you are going to listen to Paul and Andrea talk about their family. Ask students to read the sentences carefully first to get the True or False.- Ask students to get the difficult words.- Read the tape-script loudly to the class.- Ask students to decide the answers .

- Listen to the teacher and open textbooks

- 0ne or two students talk about their family.

- Read the new words.

- Listen and note down

- Work in pairs to ask and answer + P : -They are having a party. - There are 9 people in the family

- Keep book open- Listen to the teacher

- Read the sentence carefully to get the True or False statements. - Ask for the difficult ones.- Listen to the teacher.- Speak out the

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

12

Page 13: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng - Listen and remark. - Ask students the question : - Why do you think it is true / false ?

- Help them if necessary

Task 2- Ask students to look through the sentences in task 2- Ask students to listen again and note down two things that are different about Paul’s and Andrea’s families.

After-listening: (10 minutes)- Ask students to open the books- Ask them to discuss the importance of family in a person’s life- Let them work in pairs- Walk round and help students

- Ask some students to stand up and go to board and write - Listen and correct mistakesHomework: (3 minutes)- Ask students to write a passage about the importance of family in a person’s life -Remember them to prepare Part- Writing at home

sentences individually.

PS : 1, It is false2, It is false3, It is false4, It is true5, It is true

- Listen and work in pairs to speak out some information they have heard from the tape.

-Discuss and find out the the importance of family in a person’s life- The students who are called go to board and write down your answer

-Listen to the teacher and write down homework

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

13

Page 14: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 5 th period Date: 24/8Grade 12

Theme: Home LifeUnit 1WritingTime 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students can write a paragraph about family rules depending the given prompts2. General knowledge: Students learn how to write a

description , stages of a description Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

14

Page 15: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Language: - New words: Words related to the topic3. Skills: Writing a narrativeII. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Student’s book, notebook, some picturesIV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)A word game.- Divide the class into 4 groups - Ask students to work in groups to revise the words using to say about family(in 2 minutes)- Call the representatives of the groups to write as many words on the boards as possible. (in 2 minutes)- The winner is the students who has got the largest number of correct words on the board.- Call some students to repeat the meanings of the words.

Pre-writing: (10 minutes)- - Ask students to use the following verbs and expressions. Give and read some words aloud : _ Let ,allow, be allowed to, have to, permit, etc. + Some expressions :- doing household chores- coming home late - preparing meals - watching TV - talking on the phone

- Keep book close- Listen to the teacher and work in pairs- Work in groups to revise the words- Go to the board to write the words

- Repeat the meanings of the words in front of the class

- Listen to the teacherand open the books- Read all words and expressions and work in pairs . A : Do you have to do the household chores ? B : Yes, after my studying or my free time. A : Are you

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

15

Page 16: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng - using the family motorbike- Listen to the pairs and help them if they get some difficulties in speaking. - Ask students to stand up and say a paragraph about his/her family.

While-writing: (18 minutes)Task 2Ask students to use the ideas they ‘ve dicussed to write a leter to a pepal about their family. -Give some out line : first, second ,further more, and...finally.....etc.

- Call two good students present their outline in front of the class - Ask the others comment - Feedback and give some correction to help students to have a better outline to write.Post-writing: (10 minutes)- Give suggestions and corrections- Ask students to read another’s description- Ask some students to read

allowed to come home late ? B: No, because my parents are strict.. A : Do you often prepare the meals ? etcEach representative of a group stand up and say about the family. A: - In my family , everybody has to do the household chores. I’m not allowed to come home late, I only can watch TV when I finish my homework......

+ Write the letter individually. - Every family has its own rules. Mine has a few. First, everybody has to do the house hold chores, we only go out or watch TV when we finish all homework........

- Some students read loudly their

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

16

Page 17: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngloudly their description

- Correct mistakes and markHomework: (2 minutes)- Ask students to do part writing of Unit 1 in the student’s work book and prepare part Language Focus

products in front of the class...

- Listen to the teacher and write down homework

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

17

Page 18: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 6 th period Date: 25/8Grade 12

Theme: Home LifeUnit 1Language FocusTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Pupils can pronounce the endings /s/ ,/z/

2. Knowledge: - General knowledge:+ Students have to remind of tense :past simple, past progressive and present perfect.

+ Students have to do some exercises of tense- New words: Words related to topic3. Skills: Intonation and phrasal verbsII. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Student’s book, pictures, board, tape,

cassetteplayer, chalks. IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesPronunciation: (8 minutes)- Guide students to pronounce the endings /s/,/z/ : bats /s/ . bags /z/- Ask students to read the up the words and the sentences - Ask students to read up in chorus twice - Call some students to read up in front of the class

Listen to the teacher.

- Listen to the teacher and read up

- Read up in chorus twice- Some students

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

18

Page 19: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

. GRAMMAR:(35munites)1,Tense of verbs: * Ask students to repeat the they’ve leant. + The past simple. + The past progressive. + The present perfect. - Ask students to give some sentences. - Let students compare the differences ebtween past simple and present perfectListen and give remarks

Exercise 1:- Ask students to work in groups to do the exercise 1.- Ask students to choose their suitable verbs in the sentences.

read up in front of the class

- Listen to the teacher and speak out . P1: - past simple P2: - past progressive P3 : present perfect

- Some students give more examples.* Example : - He left the room last week. - They were having dinner at 8 o’clock last night. -She has learnt English since she was in grade 1. - Work in pairs and give the differences. * past simple : happened and finished with the definite time in the past ,not related to thepresent. -Ex : He bought a car yesterday.* present perfect : started in the past but related to present or future and give the result at present.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

19

Page 20: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Call the leader of each group present their answers on the board

- Ask the whole class to comment

Exercise 2:- Ask students to work in groups to do the exercise 2.- Ask students to decide which answer ( A, , B,or C)- Call the leader of each group present their answers on the board- Ask the whole class to comment

Homework : (2 minutes)Ask students to do Part Language Focus and prepare part Reading of Unit 2 at home

-Ex : She has learnt English since she was in the grade 5.

- Work in groups to do the exercise

1. Have you seen2. Did you enjoyed it?.3. has been.4. Did you give/saw.5. didn’t listen6. Have you two met before ?7,Have you met ?- Discuss the answers and give comment on the sentences

- Listen to the teacher and work in groups to do the exercise.1, B : haven’t written2, C : have been3, A : had4, A : haven’t done5, B : have stopped6, B : am waiting7, B : have changed8, C : live9, A : decided10,B : becomes11,B : told12,C :moved13,C : come14, C : stay

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

20

Page 21: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

15, B : am going

- Redo the exercises - Do the exercises in the workbook

- Prepare for the next lesson

Unit 2: cultural diversityThe 7 th period Date : 26/8Grade 12

Theme: cultural diversityUnit 2ReadingTime: 45 minutes

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

21

Page 22: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: - Students read passage comprehension about role of cultural diversity- Students know how to use the new words through asking and answering2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: - Through this unit, students know more about cultural diversity- New words: Words related to the topic( culture, society....)3. Skills: -Guessing meaning from context

-Summarizing main idea -Passage comprehension

II. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Board, tape, cassetteplayer, chalks, textbook and notebookIV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (4 minutes)- Ask students to list out the factors that create a happy life-Let students work in pairs-Ask students questions_Lead in: Today, we’ll study a new lesson Unit 2- part A :ReadingPre-reading: (7 minutes)- Ask students to work in groups of four and guess what are happening in the picture.Hang on the blackboard the table of the questions to help students to guess the activity in each picture:- Which of the following factors is the most important for a happy life ?W hy ?

- Listen to the teacher

- Answer the question

Work in groups to talk about theactivities in the pictures- Look at the questions and try to answer them in groups to discuss.

- One student Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

22

Page 23: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

- Love, money, parents’ approval, a nice house,a good job, good health...etc.- Ask the representatives of the groups to express their ideas in front of the class.- Give the feedback+ Pre-teach some new words - precede (v) - counterpart(n)- confide(v) - sacrifice (v)- Ask students to read up in chorus twice.- Ask students to guess the meaning of the new words.+ Introduce the situation of the passage+ Show students the tasks of the readingWhile-reading: (20 minutes)- Make the class read the small talks, to scan the details and do the tasksTask 1 : Ask students to read the passage in skim to make sure the meaning of the words.- Call some students to show the meanings - Ask students to read the passage again and do the task in groups of four- Call on some students to read the answers in front of the class.- Ask students to read the sentences with the words given

speaks out his/her ideas in front of the class .

- Look at the board, note down.

- Read the new words in chorus twice.- Work in groups to guess meanings of the words.- Listen to the teacher

Read the passage in skim

- Show the meaning of the words.- Work in groups to fill in the blanks.- Read the italicized words/ phrases and explain in front of the class :1, precede : happen or exist2, determine : find out3,confide : tell somebody about something very private or secret

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

23

Page 24: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Task 2- Ask students to work in groups of 8 to answer the questions given.- Call on some students to show the class the right answers

-Listen to the students and help them if neccesary.

Post-reading: (12 minutes)Ask students to work in groups to discuss about the question : + What are the differences between a traditional Vietnamese family and a morden Vietnamese family ? - Give some suggested words to talk about a family :number of children, the house they like to have, the head of the

4,sacrifice : willingly stop having something you want5, obliged : having a duty to something.

- Work in pairs to answer the questions. A: What are the four key values in the survey ? B: They are Physical attractiveness, Confiding,........ A: Who are much more concerned with physical........... ?

B :The young Americans are much more concerned than the young Indians and the Chinese........A: What are the Indian students’ attitudes on a partnership of equals ? B :The Indian students agree that a woman gas to sacrifice........

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

24

Page 25: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

family , who works , who takes care of the housework and children , the income...

- Call on some representatives on the groups to talk about the differences

Homework : (2 minutes)-Do reading text in workbook-Prepare the next lesson

- Read the questions carefully and work in pairs to answer the questions. A: - I think a modern family has fewer children than a traditional one. the head of the family in a modern family is both a husband and wife, they share the household chores and take care of their children....- Work in groups to discuss to compare to other groups.

- Talk in front of the class about the class.

-Listen to the teacher and take note

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

25

Page 26: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 8 th period Date: 27/8Grade 12

Theme: cultural diversityUnit 2SpeakingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students can talk about the differences among cultures2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: - Through this unit, students can talk

about the differences among cultures- Know how to arrange opinions sensibly

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

26

Page 27: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Language: Students use sentences, words, phrases and

expressions for making their view3. Skills: Fluency in expressing opinion and expressions for

making a opinionII. Method: Integrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Pictures, English textbook 12, hand-outsIV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Student’s activities NotesWarm-up:(5minutes)Checking the last lesson- Call two students to go to the board.Students 1 and 2 : Talk about the differences between a traditional family and a modern family they’ve written at home.- Ask the other students to comment about the talking.- Feedback and give correction if necessary - Lead the whole class to the topic of the lesson.Pre-reading: (8 minutes)

- Task 1: We are going to talk about the differences among cultures .- Ask students to express their point of view on the followings ideas , using the words or expressions in the box.* In Vietnam ,three or even four generations may live in home.* A happy mariage should based on love.* In some Asian countries , love is supposed to follow marriage not precede it.

- Listen to the teacher

-Read the paragraph in front of the class

- Listen to the teacher

- Read the sentences given and work in groups to dicuss.A : In my opion,it is not good for three or four generations to live in a family because they will

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

27

Page 28: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

* In some countries, a man and a woman may hold hands and kiss each other in public.- Listen to the students and give remark

While –speaking : (16munites)Task 2: - Ask students to work in pairs to discuss about the differences between the culture in America and in Vietnam. +Give the culture in America:- Two generations ( parents and children ) live in a home.- Old- aged live in nursing home.- It is not polite to ask questions about age, marriage and income.- Americans can greet anyone in the family first.- Groceries are bought once a week.- Christmas and New Year holidays are the most important.- Children sleep in their own bedrooms.

+ Listen to the students and

find it difficult to sympathy their interests and habbits ...and I agree that love is supposed to follow mariage not precede it. B: I don’t agree with your ideas, I think it is good to have three or four generations living under one roof because they can help each other a lot

- Work in pairs to discuss and give their ideas about the differences+ Give the culture in Vietnam. -There are more generations in a home (grand parents, parents and children ...)- Elders live with their children and are taken care of by their sons.- Can ask the questions about the age, marriage and income..- Have to greet the older first.- Do the shopping

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

28

Page 29: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïnggive more the ideas about the differences.

Post-reading: (14 minutes)Task 3:- Ask students to work in pairs or work in groups to talk about the similarities and differences between Vietnamese and American cultures, using the features discussed in the task 2 .

- Listen and give remarks on their opinions

Homework:(2minutes)-Students write a paragraph about the cultures in Vietnam.- Do the exercises in the workbook

- Prepare for the next lesson

everyday.- Tet holiday is the most important.- Children can share bedrooms with the other in a family.

- Work in groups or in pairs to compare. Ps : - There are differences and similarities between Vietnamese and American cultures .In America, two generations (parents and children) live in ahome . In Vietnam, two, threeor even four generations live under one roof...etc.

-Listen and copy

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

29

Page 30: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 9 th period Date : 28/8Grade 12

Theme: cultural diversityUnit 2ListeningTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students should know how to listen

to give some information about the wedding ceremony in Vietnam.2. Knowledge:

- General knowledge: Students learn about the wedding ceremony in Vietnam.- Language:- New words: Words related to culture, wedding3. Skills: -Filling in missing information

-Passage comprehensionII. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aid: Board, tape, cassetteplayer, chalks, textbook and notebook.IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up : (4 minutes)- Ask students look at the pictures and have a comparison ?- Let students look at the picture and describe and

- Listen and answer- Work in pairs and each and answer

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

30

Page 31: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïnganswer some questions:1,Where do the women come from?2,What are they doing?3,do they have happy life? why do you know?- Listen and give markPre-listening : (6 minutes)Ask students to work in groups to ask and answer about the picture.- Hang the table with the questions on the board.+ Have you ever attended a wedding ceremony?+ What do the bride and the groom usually do at the wedding ceremony?- Ask students to ask and answer freely.- Give some words : altar, banquet,groom, ancestor ,blessing, tray......

While-listening: (24 minutes)Task 1: Introduction: You are going to hear two people talking about a wedding ceremony in Vietnam.- Introduction: you are going to listen to the conversation to get the information to fill in the missing information- Let the students read all the sentences before listening

-

- Look at the picture and the table of the questions to ask and answer about the picture in pairs.

S1: -They often stand in front of theater praying and asking their ancestor’s permission to be married.

S2:- They exchange their wedding rings.

S3:-They get the presents from their relative and their friends.

- Listen to the teacher or the tape.

- Read the sentences and then listen to the teacher or the radio carefully.1, groom’s parents.2, red paper3, altar

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

31

Page 32: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng1, The wedding day is carefully chosen by the........2, The gifts are wrapped in............3,The wedding ceremony starts in front of the..........4,Food and drink are served.......

5,The guests give the newly wedded couple envelopes containing ........... and..........

- Ask students to compare the answers with a partner.- Call on some students to go the board to write their answers - Ask students to explain their answers in front of the class - Feedback and Correct the answersTask 2: -Ask students to listen to the passage again and answer the questions - Ask the students to read all the questions before listening. - Let the students listen to the tape two or three times and answer the questions.

4, at the wedding banquit5,wedding cards or money

- Work in pairs to compare the answers

-

- Listen and try to get the information to answer the questions- Read the questions carefully.- Work in groups to discuss and answer the questions.1,The most important thing the groom’s family has to do on the wedding day is to go to the bride’s house bringing gifts wrapped in red paper.2,They would

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

32

Page 33: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

After-listening: (10 minutes)- Ask students to work in groups to answer the question : What do families often do to prepare for a wedding ceremony?- Call some 2 leaders of the groups to talk in front of the class - FeedbackHomework: (2 minutes) - *.Write a paragraph about a wedding.– Prepare for the next lesson.

pray ,asking their ancestors’ permission to get married.3, After they pray and ask their ancestors’ permission to get married................

Work in pairs to answer the questions.

- Listen and copy in their notebooks

The 10 th period Date : 29/8Grade 12

Theme: cultural diversityUnit 2WritingTime: 45 minutes

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

33

Page 34: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Student can describing typical features of a Vietnamese conical leaf hat.2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: Students could write a report to describe typical features of a Vietnamese conical leaf hat.- Language: Words used in a Vietnamese conical leaf hat3. Skills: Describing a Vietnamese conical leaf hatII. Method: Interagrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Some models of chart, real information in lifeIV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up : (4 minutes)- Work in pairs to talk about the special things in Vietnam.- Call the best student in the class to tell his/her story to the class.- Comment and lead students to the topic of the lesson.

Pre-writing: (10 minutes)Task 1- Ask the students to write about the conical or the “non la”, a symbol of Vietnamese culture.- Give some new words : leaf, rim, ribs, strap.- Ask students to observe the photo of the “non la”

While-writing: (20 minutes)Task 2Let students write a passage

-Work in pairs to talk

- Some students talk about their experience in front of the class . + Banh trung,ao dai, non la,......

Listen to the teacher

- Listen to the teacher and read aloudthe words

Read the words Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

34

Page 35: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngof about 150 words about the conical leaf hat , using the outline and information below.* Introduction : - symbol of Vietnamesegirls/women. Part of the spirit of the Vietnamese nation.* Main body: - special kind of bamboo and young /soft palm leaves, conical form, diameter,.........*Conclusion : - protecting people from sun/rain and girls/women look pretty/attractive.

Post-writing: (10 minutes)Ask students change the letter with a partner to read.- Call a good students to read the letter in front of the class.- Feedback and give some suggestions

Homework: (2 minutes)- Ask students to do the exercises in the workbook.

given and write a passsage : - The conical leaf hat is one of the typical features (symbols) of the the Vietnamese culture because it can not be found any where in the world .The leaf hat is not only a symbolof Vietnamese girls/women.........- Write the letter individually.

- Read the letter of the partner.

- Read the letter in front of the class

-Do the exercise at home.- Prepare for the next lesson

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

35

Page 36: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 11 th period Date : 30/8Grade 12

Theme: cultural diversityUnit 2Language FocusTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives: 1. Educational aim: Students can pronounce the sounds “ ed”

ending2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: Students have to revise the tenses - Language:- New words: Words related to topic3. Skills: - Pronunciation: the sounds “ ed” ending- Grammar: - revise the tensesII. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Board, tape, cassetteplayer, chalks, textbook and notebookIV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Notes

I. Pronunciation(10 munites)a. Distinguishing sounds:- Read the three sounds: /t/, / d/, / id / as model for the class and explain the differences in producing them.- Read the sounds again and ask students to repeat.- Ask students to read the words in each column out aloud in chorus for more a few times.

- Read aloud- Listen and repeat from 2-3 times- Some of them stand and read words aloud

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

36

Page 37: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

- Call on some students to read the words in front of the class - Correct the mistakes of pronunciation.b. Practising sentences containing the target sounds- Ask students to work in pairs to take turn to read the given sentences - Go round to listen and take notes of the typical errors- Call on some students to read the sentences in front of the class again and provide corrective feedback.II. Grammar: (34munites)* Exercise 1: a. Presentation:- Review the forms, meanings and uses of the present simple, present perfect, and present continuous, past perfect...+ Present simple* FORM:* MEANING: PRESENT TIME* USE:

sometimes use the present simple to express the ideas that an action is happening or+ Express the idea that an action is repeated or usual. The action can be a habit, a hobby, a daily event, a scheduled event or something that often happens. It can also be something a person often forgets or usually does not do.+ Speakers is not happening now. This can not only be done with Non-Continuous Verbs

-Listen to the teacher

- Read the sentences in chorus aloud

- Listen and copy-List some phrasal verbs : fill in ;turn on; go over ;look at ;make up. Look after ....

- Some students read the sentences in front of the class.

- Work in groups to review thetenses

- Listen to the teacher to the teacher and note down

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

37

Page 38: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

and certain Mixed Verbs.+ Present continuous* FORM:* MEANING: PRESENT TIME* USE: + Present perfect/Present perfect progressive.* FORM:* MEANING: PRESENT TIME* USE: We use the present perfect to say that the action happened at an unspecified time before now. The exact time is not important. So we can use Present Perfect to describe our experience “I have the experience of …” we can use this tense to say that we have never had a certain experience. The Present Perfect is NOT used to describe a specific event + With Non-Continuous Verbs and non-continuous uses of Mixed Verbs we use present perfect to show that something started in the past and has continued up until now. “for five minutes”, “for two weeks”, and “since Thursday” are all which can used with the Present Perfect.NOTE:- We CAN NOT use the Present Perfect with specific time expressions: yesterday, a year ago, last month, …- We CAN NOT use the Present Perfect with unspecific expressions: ever, never, once, many times, several times,

- Listen to the teacher to the teacher and note down

- Listen to the teacher and note down

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

38

Page 39: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

before, so far, already, yet, etc.b. Practice:- Ask students to do the exercise individually and then choose a partner tocheck the answers with.- Call 2 students to write their answers on the board - Provide corrective feedback.

* Exercise 2:a. Presentation:- Review the forms, meanings and uses of the past simple, and past continuous+ Past perfect : form/ meaning/ use.b. Practice:- Ask students to do the exercise 2 individually and then choose A,B or C to complete the passage.- Call 2 students to write their answers on the board - Provide corrective feedback* Exercise 3:

Ask students to complete the letter with the correct form of the verbs in brackets.check the answers with.- Call 2 students to write their answers on the board - Provide corrective feedbackHomework: (2 minutes)- Ask students to redo the exercises into the note-workbooks- Ask students do the exercises in the workbook

Review the formation and the uses of the tense

- Students do the exercise individually and then compare the answers with a friend- Write the answers on the board

-Do the exercise individually and check the answers with a partner-Some students go to the board to write the answers

- Listen and note down

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

39

Page 40: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

- Ask students to prepare for the next lesson.

Unit 3: ways of socialisingThe 12 th period Date : 3/9Grade 12

Theme: ways of socialisingUnit 3ReadingTime: 45 minutes

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

40

Page 41: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students can +Develop such reading micro-skills as guessing meaning from context

+ Use the information they have read to answer the questions

+ Pictures in the student’s book enlarged.+ A table of the active words of the passage.

2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: Students could understand and use the new words through speaking, asking and answering- Language:- New words: Words relate to ways of socialising3. Skills: -Reading for general or specific information

-Guessing meaning from contextII. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Some photos of ways of socialising and some information about them. Board, tape, cassetteplayer, chalks, textbook and notebook.IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (4 minutes)

- Ask students to list some ways of communication they have know

- Let students work in pair- Check the whole class

Pre-reading: (7 minutes)- Ask students to work in groups to discuss about the pictures in the textbook.- Ask students to use the questions to ask and answer about the pictures :- What are the people in the pictures doing?- What will you do if you want to get your teacher’s attention in

-Listen to the teacher -Give their answer

-Work in groups to discuss about the pictures - Work in pairs to ask and answer

- Some students answer the

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

41

Page 42: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

class?- What will you do if you need to ask someone a question but they are busy talking to someone else?- Comment and lead the whole class to the topic of the passage.* Pre-teach: New words and phrases: - write some new words and phrases on the board+verbal(a) + non –

verbal(a)+ attract (v) + nod (v) + approach (v)

+ rude (a)

- Ask students to guess the meanings of the words - Ask students to read the words in chorus twice.- Call two students to read the words in front of the class While-reading: (20 minutes)- Let students open the book and read silently while teacher reads aloud and correctly- Ask students to read themselves and write down some information- Let students work in pairs to do the task 1Task 1- Ask students to read the passage and give the Vietnamese equivalents to the following words phrases. - Verbal : bằng lời,hữu ngôn- Non- verbal :không bằng lời- Attract someone’s

questions in front of the class.

- Look at the board and note down

Guess the meaning of the words and phrases.- Listen to the teacher and read up the words and phrases in chorus - Some students read them in front of the class

- Read the passage in skim to guese the meaning of the words- Ask students to work in groups to guess the meaning of the phrases

Some students

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

42

Page 43: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

attention :thu hút chú ý- impolite :không lịch sự- rude : thô tục, thô lỗ-informality:thân mật- approach : tiếp cận-a slight nod will do :một cái gật đầu nhẹ là đủ

Call on some students to show their answers in front of the class.- Comment and give the correct answers Task 2: - Ask students to read the passage again to choose the best title for the passage.- Call four students to go to the board the write their answers - Ask some students to correct and remark with giving the reason why they have chosen it- Feedback and give the right answers Task 3 :- Ask students to work in pairs to answer the questions .

- Listen to the students and remark.

Post-reading: (10 minutes)- Ask students to work in groups to discuss the meaning of whistling and clapping in Vietnamese culture.

show the answers in front of the class.

-Work in groups and give their ideas.

Ps : A ( Attracting Attention : Non- verbal Cues)

- Work in pairs to anwer the questionsP1:What can you do when you want to attract someone’s attention?P2 :We can use either verbal or non verbal.P1 : What are considered to be big, obvious non verbal signals?P2 :They are strong actions that can easily be seen...etc.

-Practice talking about communication by non- verbal

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

43

Page 44: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

- Call on some representatives of the groups to answer the questions in front of the class.

Homework (4 minutes)-Ask students to learn the new words and phrases - Ask students to prepare for the next lesson.

actions.- to express the happiness they can whistle or clap- sometimes, they clap or whistle to encourage or despise.- Listen and note down

- Listen to the teacher.- Do the exercises at home- Prepare for the next lesson.

The 13 th period Date : 4/9Grade 12

Theme: ways of socialisingUnit 3speakingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students should know

+ Use appropriate language to practise giving and responding to compliments in different situations

+ Use appropriate language to talk about other ways of communication

2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: Students can talk about other ways of

communication- Language: Words to speak about ways of communication3. Skills: -Ask and answer the information about ways of communicationII. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

44

Page 45: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngIII. Teaching aids: Photos of some famous persons or some

real information about ways of communicationIV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Notes

Warm-up: (3 minutes)Introduction: we are going to talk about the different ways of communication.- Ask students to work in groups to talk about some ways to attract to other people. - Give students some words and phrases (Hang on the extra board of prompts).+ terrific (a)+ decent (a) + to be kiding- Ask students to practise speaking Pre-speaking: (8 minutes)Task 1- - Introduce the task: Now work in pairs, take turn to practise readig the dialoge, paying attention to how compliments are received in each situation.- Ask students to read all the questions in the task and explain the difficult words and phrases if necessary.- Ask students to do the task in roles and encourage the whole class to take note the answers while they are doing the task.- Go around the class to check and offer help.

- Listen to the teacher and say

about the ways of communication

- Look at the board and read aloud the new words.

- Work in pairs to practise speaking.- Some couples to play roles to speak in front of the class.P1 : PhilP2 : BarbaraP3 : PeterP4 : CindyP5 :TomP6 : Tony

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

45

Page 46: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

While-speaking: (20 minutes)Task 2- - Ask students to work in pairs to practise giving compliments to suit the resposes using the outlines that they have already made - Go around the class to check and offer help.- Call on some couples to perform their conversation in front of the class. - Elicit feedback from the class and give final comments.* Task 3:- Introduce the duty of the task: - Divide the class into 7 groups of 8 - Ask students to work in groups to practise responding the compliments below.- Go around the class to check and offer help.

Post-speaking: (10 minutes)* Task 4:- Ask the groups to make dialoge to practisegiving and respoding to compliments , using the cues below.- a nice pair of glasses- a new and expensive watch- a new cell phone- a modern looking pair of shoes- a fashionable jacket

- Work in pairs to give suitable words. P1 : David P2 : Kathy P3 : Hung P4 : Hien P5 :Michael P6 : Colin

- Listen to the teacher - Work in roles to practise speakingP1 : PhilP2 : YouP3 : Peter P4 : Tom..........

Listen and work in pairs to make a dialoge based on the Task 1,2 ,3. A : You really have a nice pair of glaases I think they make you attractive. B: Thank you,Nam. That’s a nice compliment. A : I think you

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

46

Page 47: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Call some representatives of groups to report the parties that they have made.Listen to the students and note down all the errors

Homework: (2-4 minutes)- Summarise the main points of the lesson - Ask students to write a dialogue about the compliment

have a new and expensive watch which I have never seen before. B : Thank you . I bought it yesterday. A:............

- Listen and write down in their notebooks

The 14 th Period Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

47

Page 48: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngDate : 14/9Grade 12

Theme: ways of socialisingUnit 3ListeningTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students should know to develop

such listening micro-skills as intensive listening for specific information2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: Students know how to give information after listening - Language: - New words: Words related to ways of socialsing3. Skills: - Listening for general or specific information -Comprehension questionsII. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Some pictures of persons or some real

information about them. Board, tape, cassetteplayer, chalks, textbook and notebook.

IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (4 minutes)- Ask students to close the book- Give some questions : + Who’s on duty today ? + Who’s absent today ?-Pre-listening: (8 minutes)- Show students the pictures in the textbook and ask students to guess what they are doing ?

- Ask students to work in pairs to ask and answer the questions in the textbook.

- - Listen to the teacher, and answer the questions.

- Read silently the sentences given before listening- Listen the first time- No, we haven’t- Listen the second time and begin

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

48

Page 49: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Call some students to answer the questions in front of the class. Then explain their reasons.Check the whole class.* Pre-teaching some new words and phrases.- Ask students to read the words aloud twice.- Explain some new words:+ marvellous(a) +startling(a) absolute(a):hoàn toàn + installed: lắp đặt + chitchat(v)

While-listening: (20 minutes)Task 1+ Introduction: You are going to listen to Linda Cupple, a social worker, advise young people on how to use the telephone in their family. Listen and decideTrue or False statements.- Ask students to read the statements carefully before play the tape. Ask students to work in groups to guess the answers.- Play the tape (read the tapescript) once for students to listen and do the task - Ask students to work in pairs to check the answers.- Call some students to show their answers in front of the class.- Feed back and give the

doing the task- Listen the third time and work in groups to decide the best answer- Each group asks and explains why they choose by some information they’ve listened

-Keys : 1C ,2A ,3C ,4A ,5B- Listen and read the words aloud in chorus .

- Write down the new words

+ Listen to the teacher and try to guese the contend of the talk in the tape.

- Work in pairs and read the statements carefully.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

49

Page 50: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngcorrect answers:1. T2. F (the most obvious problem) 3. T4. F(if your parents do not agree)5. F (is made mostly by young people) 6. T* Task2:Introduction: - You are going to listen to part of Ms Linda Cupple ‘s talk again and write the missing words.- Ask students to read the paragraph carefully and work in pairs to discuss and answer the missing words before listening again the talk.- Play the tape ( or read) the talk again for the whole class- Ask students to give the missing words individually.

- Play the tape ( or read) the story again for the whole class to check the answers.- Feedback and give the correct answers.Answer: 1. agreed 5.waking2. to avoid. 6.heart3. particular. 7. kindness4. adults 8. to stickPost-reading: (10 minutes)- Ask students to listen to the talk again and try to summarize the talk.

-Some students speak out their answers and explain why they have chosen it.A : I think the first sentence is true because it isin the secon paragraph.( 1: T)B : I think it is False because it is the most obvious problem.A : ...........

- Listen to the teacher and read the part of the talk .

- Work in groups and try to guese the missing words.- Listen to the tapescript - Check the answers in groups

- Listen to the teacher and note down the correct answers

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

50

Page 51: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Call some couples to talk in front of the class.

- Summaries the main points of the lesson

Homework: (2- 4 minutes)- Ask students to write a paragraph about their own birthday parties.- Ask students to prepare for the next lesson.

Work in groups and practise talking about Ms Linda Cupple’s talk. Ps : In this talk Ms Linda Cupplegive us some pieces of advice on how to use the telephone in the family. The first is to work out a reasonable.....- Some couples present the talk in front of the class.

- Listen to the teacher - Do homework and prepare the next lesson.

The 15 th Period Date : 15/9Grade 12

Theme: ways of socialisingUnit 3WritingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students should know

+ Building sentences based on given words.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

51

Page 52: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

+ Re- ordering given sentences to make a complete paragraph.

2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: Students learn to Re- order given

sentences to make a complete paragraph.- Language: Words used in writing about a paragraph.

3. Skills: Writing about a letter of recommendationII. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Some cues, information of someoneIV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (4 minutes)- Ask students to close the books-- Ask students some questions:* Who is absent from the class today ?* Who is on duty, today? * What should you do if you want to talk to someone?Pre-writing: (8 minutes)Task 1You are going to write use the words to make sentences. Change the form of the verbs (No addition or omission is required).- Ask students to read the words in the Task 1 and then make the full sentences.1,there/be / many ways/ tell someone/ goodbye, /most of /them/depend/on the situation/and/at hand.2,however/there/be/one rule/that /all situations/ observe:abruptly/we/seldom/

- Answer the questions

-Read the requirement carefully and read the words carefully.

- Ps practise writing the full sentences.1,There are many ways to tell someone goodbye, and most of themdepend on the situation at hand.2, However, thereis one rule that all situations observe: We seldom say goodbye abrutly

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

52

Page 53: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngsay goodbye.3, in/English/it/be/necessary/prepare/a person/ for our department4, we/lead/into the farewell/by/say/something pleasant and thoughtful/like/ “ I’ve/really/enjoy/5,we/might/also say/something/relating to/the/time/like/ “Gosh”,/I can’t/believe/how/late/it/be/I/really/must/be/go

While-writing: (18 minutes)- Introduce to do task2 - Ask students to put the sentences of the two paragraphs below in their right order . & Paragraph 1:- Call on some students to order the sentences in front of the class. - Elicit the others to comment and give the correct answers.- Feedback and give the correct answers& Paragraph 2:- Ask students to order the sentences as the same the task 1.

-Elicit the others to comment and give the correct answers.- Feedback and give the

3,In English it is necessary to prepare a person for our departure4, We lead into the farewell by saying something pleasant and thoughtful like “I’ve really enjoyed talking to you”5,We might also say something relating to the timeline “Gosh, I can’t believe how late it is! I must be going!”

Do the task individually and then compare the answers with a friend- Some students show the order of the sentences in front of the class.+1- C : It is difficult to write rules that tell exactly when you should opologize,but it is not difficult to learn how.+ 2- E : If we have done something to hurt someone’s feeling, weopologize.+ 3 – A: An opology indicates that we realize we’ve made a

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

53

Page 54: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngcorrect answers

Post-writing: (13 minutes)- Ask students to write other dialogues about the ways of communication withthe situation given.1, How should you do when you are late for class?2, You’ve made some mistakes in your writing. You want to talk to the teacher about it? ...etc.

Homework: (2 minutes)

mistake,and we’re soory for it.+..........- Work in pairs to exchange the sentences in order of a paragraph.+ 1- C :The simplest way to opologize is to say “ I’m sorry”.+ 2- E : Let’s take a common situation. Tom is late for class and enters the classroom.+ 3 – B : What does he do? The most polite action is usually to take a seat as quietly as possibleand opologize later.+4 – A : But if the teacher stops and waits for him to say something .........+ 5- D :Naturally, more than this is needed, but it is not the time.......

Work in groups and then each presentative of each group go to the board to write their dialoges.Ps :1, I should opologize to the teacher and the class for being late

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

54

Page 55: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Do the writing task in student’s workbook-Prepare the next lesson

2,I think it is necessary to say “ I’m sorry” . Could you help me correct them?

Listen and take note

The 16 th Period Date : 16/9Grade 12

Theme: ways of socialisingUnit 3Language FocusTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students can pronounce the stress in

two- syllable words2. Knowledge:

- General knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:

+ Remind of the ways of changing the reported speech.+ Students can do the tasks well

- Language: the ways of changing the reported speech3. Skill: the stress in two- syllable words

II. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Board, tape, cassetteplayer, chalks,

textbook and notebookIV. Procedures:

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

55

Page 56: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngTeacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesI. Pronunciation: (15 minutes)- Explain how to pronounce the stress in two – syllable words. * If verbs, adj , adv, prepositions if the second syllable which has long vowel or double vowel( except ou )- the stress falls the second syllable. But if the second syllable which has short vowel or double vowel or finishes by one consonant the stress falls the first syllable. * For nouns in whichthe second syllable have short vowel the stress falls the first syllable(` money ). If the second syllable which has long vowel or double vowel the stress falls the second syllable ( de’sign)- Ask students to read the words and practise giving the correct stress.- Call some students to read the words in front of the class. Practising sentences: - Ask students to work in pairs and give the correct stress of the words in the sentences and then read the aloud the given sentences - Call some students to read the sentences in front of the class. - Comment and read the sentences once to the whole class.

Listen to the teacher and write some rules in the notebooks- Ex : Polite/ai/, police/ i:/,between

- waving/ei/, pointing.........

- student, signal.....

- design, police.........

- Listen to the teacher and work in pairs to give the correct stress.- Read the words in front of the class.

- Work in pairs to practise giving the correct stress of the words in the sentences.

- Some students read in front of the class. - Listen to the

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

56

Page 57: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

II. Grammar: (20 minutes)Exercise 1: Presentationa, - Ask students remind of the rules to change the reported speech: + Change the tenses of verbs+ Change pronouns suitable with the situations given.+ Change the time as the sentences given .b, Practise doing exercise 1 - Let students read the situation and change into the reported speech.

- Let students practise doing exercise and each of them stands and speak out the sentences they’ve done.

- Go around , listen and hepl them if neccessary.

teacher

- Listen and remind of the ways to exchange the reported speech.

- Listen to the teacher and note down in the notebook - Practise changing the sentences.2, Thuan said he worked for a big company.3,Thuan said he was their marketing manager.4, Thuan sais the company had opened an office in Ho Chi Minh city.5,Thuan said it had been very successful.6, Thuan said he had been chosen to run an office in District 5.7, Thuan asked me howlong I had been learning English.8, Thuan said he didn’t have much time to enjoy himself.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

57

Page 58: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Exercise 2- ,Ask students to read the dialoge between Lan and Tuan , then they have to complete the conversation Tuan had with Tung by changing in reported speech.

- Let students work in pairs

b, Ask students to read the dialoge between Tung and Tuan by using reported speech to retell what Lan has told Tuan.

Go around and listen to students or help the if they

- Practise doing and speaking out the sentences they’ve changed .- Listen to the teacher’s correctionand write down their notebooks.

Work in pairs the dialogue between Lan and Tuan firstly and try to find out the tense of verbs, pronouns and time in the dialogue.* Tense: Simple present and Simple past , Simple future .....- I, you, he ,she.....- Time indecates in the dialoge.

* Work in pairs: - P1 : Lan - P2 : Tuan

+ Each pair stands up and read the dialoge.-Work in pairs and practise changing reported speech.1, She said she didn’t want to talkto you.2, She said she was

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

58

Page 59: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngneed.

Homework: (5 minutes)-Ask students to revise the whole unit - Ask students to do all the exercises.

upset too.3, She said she was not interested..4, Because you had promised to go to the cinema.5, But you hadn’t turned up .6, She said she didn’t want to see you .7, She said she didn’t believe you had tried.8, She said she would talk to you later.9, She said she had to go otherwise she would be late for school. - Each student stands and speak out their sentences they’ve made.

- Listen and write down their notebooks.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

59

Page 60: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 17 th period Date : 17/9Grade 12Test yourself A

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: - According to the TEST students can revise all the language skills and grammatical points which they have studied and used in the three units: 1,2 and 3.- Students can improve their techniques of doing the simple tests.

2. Knowledge: After this lesson, students will be able to:- Check themselves their skills in reading, speaking,

listening, writing- Improve their knowledge through the test yourself

- Language: Students can improve their techniques of doing the simple tests

3. Skill: After this lesson, students will be able to:- Check themselves their skills in reading, speaking,

listening, writing- Improve their knowledge through the test yourself

II. Method: Integrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Textbook, board, hand-outs, cassette tape and player.IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Greeting - Greeting

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

60

Page 61: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Ask students something about the test yourself A* Have you prepared it at home?* Have you got any difficulties?

Test yourself

I. Listening(2.5 points) (10 minutes)- Ask students to read all the sentences first- Ask students to listen to the tape once.- Ask students to listen again and speak out the statements are true or false .- Ask students to listen in the third time, the work in groups to compare and discuss the answers with each others to find the correct answers.

II. Reading (2.5 points) (10 minutes)- Present the task: - Ask pupils to work in groups to compare the answers they have already done to find the correct ones.- Give the correct answers to the class:1. We can communicate not only through words but also through body laguage.2. They are our posture, facial expression, gestures.3. If your posture is slumped

- Answer teacher’s questions

- Look at the book and listen to the task- understand the task- Read the questions - Listen to the tape- Listen again and say the statements are true or false.- Listen and discuss in groups to find the correct answers:1-T, 2-F, 3-F, 4-T, 5-T.

- Look at the textbook and listen to the teacher

- Work in groups to discuss about the passage- Finish the task- Compare their results with the other groups, and then with the keys- Write the answers on the board

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

61

Page 62: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngand your head is down , this could mean that you are sad or lack cofidence.4. A person who doesn’t look away is expressinga chllenge. A personwho doesn’t look at you is expressing lack of interestor is shy. 5, Because that person might be angry at you or feel superior to you.

III. Grammar(2.5 points) (8 minutes)- Present the task: A, Practise circlingthe correct anwer (A,B,C or D) to complete the letter.- Ask students to work in groups to give the correct form of verbs in the paasage.* Give the correct form of verbs.1, C: have been.2, D : will be3,B : are having4,A : could have put off5,B : will have finished6,D :have seenB, Let students finish each of of the following sentences in such a way that it has the same meaning as the original sentence.

- Listen to the teacher and correct the answers

- Listen to the teacher- Work in groups - Compare the results with the other groups- Show the answers in front of the class. - Observe the keys and correct their anwres.

*Work in groups and practise writing the sentences given in reported speech.1, Lan asked John what he had done before working for that company.2,Bill promised to come to see me the next Sunday.3, Tom apologized for not ringing me

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

62

Page 63: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

IV. Writing (7 minutes)- Present the task: - Call the students to read the suggested sentences in front of the class.+ Give the number of your family members, their names, ages and jobs.+ How do they share the housework?+ How do they behave?+What are their hobbies?+ What do you like about each of them?+ ...........................................

- Check their writings and help them correct the mistakes if they’ve made.

earlier.4,Miss White thanked Peter for giving her present.

- Students work in groups and practise writing about their families.- Two students go to the board and write.A : There are four people in my family, my father’s name is Tuan,he is fourty-five years old and he is a doctor. My mother is Lan, she is fourty years old and she is a teacher , my sister is Huong and she is a student in Hanoi, I am Hoang, sixteen years old and I am a pupil of grade 12. We are a close- knite family, we often share the household. ..........

- Give the writings by reading aloud.- Read the letter carefully- In groups or in pairs, write her a letter- Compare the

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

63

Page 64: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngHomework (5 minutes)- Ask students: + to study all the lessons again + to get ready for the 45 minute-test in the next period

results with the other groups- Correct mistakes

- Study all the lessons again- Get the knowledge ready for the coming test

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

64

Page 65: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 18 th period Date : 18/9

Test 1Grade: 12

Time limit: 45 minutes45 minute test 1

Full name :…………………………………….Class : ……………

I. Choose the word with underlined part pronounced differently from the rest (1 point ):

1 A. seats B. photographs C. drops D. bags

2 A. reads B. banks C. brothers D. lives

3 A. covered B. slipped C. snowed D. used

4 A. decided B. tried C. interested D. reminded

5 A. closed B. jumped C. walked D. placed

II. Fill in each gap with one word from the table, there are more words than needed ( 2 points):

chance nursing homes contractual nightshift arguments

banquets well-behaved hospital pressure formal

rude annoy responsibility pleasure get

together

1. My father is a doctor, he works on a ........................................ 3 times a week.2. In my family, I take the ......................................... to wash the dishes and take out the garbage.3. Students in my school are under a lot of study ............................................4. The boy who ...................................... people are mischievous.5. On Monday mornings, all teachers and students ......................................... on the schoolyard.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

65

Page 66: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng6. Marriages that are decided by the parents are called ....................................... marriages.7. Old-aged parents in America live in...........................................8. Nowadays, wedding ....................................... are usually held at restaurants or hotels.9. It's considered to be ..................................... when a student waves to his

teacher to get attention. 10. The telephone often causes ...................................... between members of the family. III. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct tenses (2 points):1. I ( buy) .................................... a new house last year but I (not sell) ................................ my old house yet so now I have two house.2. A: You ( be ) .................................. the theater lately ? B: Yes, I (go) .................................... to see the Othello last week. A: You (like) ................................ it ? B: Yes but I ( can not ) ................................. see very well, I sat at the back.3. A: I (do) ..................................... my housework all morning and I (not

finish) ..........................yet. B: I ( do)............................... mine, I (start) .................................. at 6 a.m.IV. Change the following sentences into reported speech beginning with given words (1 point):1. Helen said " I have been here for six months ". Helen

said .......................................................................................................................

2. Helen said " I will leave tomorrow '. Helen

said .......................................................................................................................

3. Helen said to John " I will give you a ring when I arrive ". Helen

promised ...............................................................................................................

4. John said to Helen " Remember to keep in touch ". John reminded

Helen ...........................................................................................................5. Helen said to John " Thank you for the good time we had together ". Helen

thanked ....................................................................................................................

V. Read the passage carefully and choose the correct answer ( 2 points) :

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

66

Page 67: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng In the past, both men and women were expected to get married at young

age. Marriages were generally arranged by parents and family. It was not surprising to find that the groom and the bride had only just met on the day of their engagement or marriage.

In modern Viet Nam , this has changed completely as people choose their own marriage-partners based on love, and in consideration primarily to their own needs and wants. Moreover, early marriage is quite illegal.

The traditional Vietnamese wedding is one of the most important occasions. Regardless of westernization, many traditional customs continue to be celebrated in wedding ceremony by Vietnamese in both Vietnam and foreign countries, often combining both western and eastern elements. Beside the wedding ceremony, there is also an engagement ceremony which usually takes place half a year before the weeding. Due to the spiritual nature of the occasion, the date and time marriage ceremony are decided in advance by a fortune-teller. The traditional Vietnamese wedding consists of the following steps; the first is the ceremony to ask permission to receive the bride, the second is procession to receive the bride 9 along with the ancestor ceremony), the third is to bring the bride to the groom's house for another ancestor ceremony and to welcome her into the family then the last is the wedding banquet. The number of guests at the banquet is large, usually in the hundred. Several special dishes are served. Guests are expected to bring gifts, money and the groom and the bride will go from table to table to thank their guests for their blessing and gifts.

1. In the past, ............................................A. Vietnamese people were free to make a decision on the marriage.B. Vietnamese marriages were decided by parents and family.C. Getting married at early age was not allowed.D. Parents had no right to interfere their children's marriage.2. At that time, the fact that the bride and the groom had only

first met on the day of their engagement or marriage was ............................

A. surprising B. popular C. uncommon D. strange3. Which sentence is true about Vietnamese modern marriage ?A. Most young people don't have their marriage based on love.B. All marriages are arranged by parents and families C. Marriage is quite westernization .D. Couples do not get married at quite young age.4. According to the passage, ..............................................A. Overseas Vietnamese people don't like to have a traditional wedding.B. There is an engagement ceremony before the wedding ceremony.C. Many traditional customs don't exist in a traditional wedding ceremony

nowadays.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

67

Page 68: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngD. Vietnamese people never ask a fortune-teller the date and time of the

marriage ceremony.5. Which does not exist in a Vietnamese wedding ceremony ?A. guests B. dishes C. firecrackers D. gifts VI. Write a short paragraph ( 80 words) about your family using the

suggestions below(2 points) :- Number of members, their ages and jobs.- Responsibilities of each member.- Some of your family rules.- The reason you like/dislike your family

................................................................................................................................

...................

................................................................................................................................

...................

................................................................................................................................

...................

................................................................................................................................

...................

................................................................................................................................

...................

................................................................................................................................

...................

................................................................................................................................

...................

................................................................................................................................

...................

................................................................................................................................

...................

................................................................................................................................

...................

................................................................................................................................

...................

................................................................................................................................

...................

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

68

Page 69: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng................................................................................................................................

...................

................................................................................................................................

...................

................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................

.........................................................

Unit 4 : SCHOOL EDUCATION SYSTEM The 19 th period Date : 18/9Grade 12

Theme: SCHOOL EDUCATION SYSTEMUnit 4ReadingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students should know school education

system in England2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: Students know about school education

system- Language: Sentences and expression for describing school education system- New words: Words related to school education system 3. Skills: Guessing meaning in context, scanning for specific information and passage comprehensionII. Method: Integrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Board, tape, cassetteplayer, chalks, textbook and notebookIV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

69

Page 70: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

- Ask Ss some questions about the picture:

- Who are they?- What are they doing?- Do you think they are

English students?

Before you read : (7 minutes)- Ask students to read the facts below and decide whether the statements about schools in Vietnam are true (T) or false (F). Then compare their results with their partners’. Facts about schools1. Children start Grade 1 when they are 6 years old. 2. Schooling is compulsory from the age of 6 to 16. 3. The school year generally begins in September and ends in late May. 4. The students do not have any examinations when they finish secondary school. 5. A school year consists of two terms.

While you read : (23 minutes)- Ask students to look through the passage and read in silence- Help students read the passage- Explain pronunciation and meaning of new words which appear in the passageTask 1 : (3 minutes) Find words or phrases in the reading passage which have the following meanings.- Let students work individual or in groups

- Open the book- Listen to the teacher - Answer the questions

- Listen to the teacher and open the book – Unit 1, part A: reading

- Look at the book, listen to the teacher and work in pairs to decide whether the statements about schools in Vietnam are true (T) or false (F). Then compare their results with their partners’.1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. T

- Listen to the teacher then read the passages - Ask some new words if necessary

- Keep the book open- Listen to the teacher then do task 1- Ask the teacher if necessary- work individual or in group

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

70

Page 71: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Help students if necessaryKeys:

1- state schools2- primary education3- secondary education4- compulsory5- General Certificate of

Secondary Education (GCSE)6- Curriculum

Task 2: (4 minutes)- Ask students to answer the following questions- Ask students look through the passages then try to answer the questions in right way- Let them work in pairs- Help students if necessary(the answers in the passage) Walk round the classroom and correct mistakesKeys: 1. from the age of 52. 3 terms3. the state school and the ‘independent’ or ‘public’ school systems4. yes5. There are 3 core subjects (English, Maths and Science)6. When Ss finish the secondary school, they can take an examination called the General Certificate of Secondary Education

After you read : (8 minutes)Ask Ss to work in groups. Tell the others one of the most difficult school subjects you are studying and what you would like your

- Write down in the notebook

- Listen to the teacher- Try to answer the questions- Practice with a partner then write them down in the note books- Ask the teacher if necessary- Listen to the teacher and make a brief note about school education system in England

- Listen to the teacher- Try to talk about school education system in England- The students who are called to stand up to talk loudly are intelligent ones

Work in groups. Tell the others one of the most difficult school

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

71

Page 72: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngfriends and your teacher to do to help you learn that subject more effectively.

Home work: (2 minutes)- Ask students to do Reading exercise of Unit 1 in workbook and prepare Part B : Speaking at home

subjects you are studying and what you would like your friends and your teacher to do to help you learn that subject more effectively.

- Listen to the teacher and write down homework

The 20 th Period Date 19/9Grade 12

Theme: school education system Unit 4SpeakingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

72

Page 73: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng1. Educational aim: Students should know school education system in Vietnam2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Students learn about school education system- Language: Talking about the school education system in Vietnam.- New words: words related to school education system3. Skills: talking about school education system II. Method: integrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Board, chalks, textbook and notebook....IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Ask students to keep book close- Write on the board names of school education system in Vietnam: University, nursery, primary school, college, kindergarten, secondary school. Then ask Ss to put them in order - Ask students to repeatTell Ss to understand more about school education system in Vietnam.(We learn Unit 1, part- speaking)

Pre-speaking : (12 minutes)Task 1- Ask Ss to work in pairs. Study the table below then ask and answer the questions about the school education system in Vietnam.- Let them work in pairs

- Keep books close- Listen to the teacher- Look at the board and try to remember names of ten subjects

- Work in pairs.- Practice asking and answering the questions about the school education system in Vietnam using the information in the table.

Example: A: When do the children in Vietnam go to primary

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

73

Page 74: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Listen to students and correct mistakes Example: A: When do the children in Vietnam go to primary school? B: When they are 6 years old. A: How long does the primary education last? B: 5 years.

While-speaking : (15 minutes)Task 2 - Teacher introduces the task “Work in groups. Talk about the school education system in Vietnam, using the information from Task 1”.- Guide students how to practise.- Ask students to work in pairs.- Help the students with new structures.- Walk around and help them.- Call some student to stand up and report before the class.- Correct their mistakes

Post-speaking : (10 minutes)Task 3-Teacher introduces the task “Work in groups. Talk about the similarities and differences between the school system in Vietnam and in England”. - Let them work in groups- Ask some students to stand up and tell loudly- Walk round and help them

school? B: When they are 6 years old. A: How long does the primary education last? B: 5 years.

- Listen to the teacher- Do task 2- Work in groups- The students are called stand up and tell loudly

Example: In Vietnam, children can go to Nursery school when they are 1 to 2 and go to Kindergarten when they are from 2 to 5

- Work in groups. Talk about the similarities and differences between the school system in Vietnam and in EnglandExample: There are some differences between the school systems in Vietnam an England. Children in Vietnam start primary school at the age of 6 and finis this level at 10 while those in England study

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

74

Page 75: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Listen and correct mistakes

Homework: (3 minutes)- Ask students to write a passage about similarities and differences between the school system in Vietnam and in England- Ask students to prepare Part C- Listening and do homework

at primary school from the age of 5 to 10. Schooling is compulsory for Vietnamese children until the age of 1 but, in England, compulsory education ends when children are 16. There is also a difference about the subjects studied at schools. On the other hand, Vietnam and England school systems have some similarities. Students in both countries have to follow the national curriculum set by the government. After finishing secondary schools they all have to take the national examination known as GCSE

- Listen to the teacher- Write down the homework

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

75

Page 76: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 21 st Period Date 20/9Grade 12

Theme: school education system Unit 4

Listening Time: 45 minutesI. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students should know about someone’s

background.2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: Students talk about someone’s

background.- Language- New words: Words related to someone’s education.3. Skill: Listening for gist and for specific informationII. Method: Integrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Board, tape, cassetteplayer, chalks,

textbook and notebookIV. Procedures:Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (4 minutes)- Ask Ss some questions about their studies at school.1. What school subjects are you good at? 2. Which ones do you enjoy most/least in your class?

- Listen to the teacher- Answer the questions:

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

76

Page 77: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngExplain why.

Pre-listening: (9 minutes)- Ask Ss to look at “Listen and repeat”- Read and ask students to listen- Let students listen again and repeat.- Write some words on board and ask students to read them aloud.- Let they work in pairs- Listen and correct mistakesWhile-listening: (20 minutes)Task 1 (10 minutes):- Ask students to read the questions quickly.- Guide students the requests of the task.- Let students listen twice.- Write on board from 1 to 6 and call some students to come and write their answers.- Let them listen again and correct.

Task 2 (10 minutes):- Teacher introduces the task “Listen again and answer the questions”. 1. When did Gavin think he listed to the teacher well?2. How did Gavin find the exams? 3. Why couldn’t Gavin pass the exams easily? 4. Why did Gavin say he didn’t think his school days were the

- Work in pairs- Listen and understand the meanings of those words.

- Read the questions quickly.- Listen to the listening script.- Answer the questions.Answer:1. Jenny/ Gavin2. Gavin3. Jenny4. 5. Jenny/ Gavin6.- Look at the task 2 and listen to the teacher- Read the questions and try to understand them- Listen to the tape script- Give correct answers:1. When he enjoyed the subjects2. He found it very difficult.3. Because they were difficult for him to do in a short time.4. Because he went away to boarding school when

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

77

Page 78: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngbest time of his life?- Read or turn on the tape script again once or twice- Help students give the correct answers

Post-listening: (10 minutes)- Teacher introduces the task “Work in pairs. Talk about the results of your current exams at school and what you will do to prepare for the next exams”. - Go round and help students - Correct mistakes

Homework: (2minutes)- Ask students to rewrite a passage about their school days in secondary school. - Ask students to prepare the part Writing at home

he was quite young and he didn’t like that. So school days weren’t the best days of his life. - Work in pairs. Talk about the results of your current exams at school and what you will do to prepare for the next examsE.g. I didn’t do well in the last exam period. I was content with my math, physics and chemistry results but my English result wasn’t very good. I made too many mistakes so I barely passed it. I think I have to spend more time studying English to get higher grade in the coming exam.

- Listen to the teacher- Write down the homework

The 22 nd Period Date 21/9Grade 12

Theme: school education system Unit 4

WritingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives: Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

78

Page 79: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng1. Educational aim: Students learn how to understand the

school education system in Vietnam 2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Students will be able to write the school

education system in Vietnam- Language- New words: Words relating to school education systems3. Skill : II. Method: Integrated mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Textbook, board markersIV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Notes

Warm-up :(3 minutes)- Ask students some questions about school education systems in Vietnam.1. How many levels of educations are there in your school system?2. How long does it take to complete each level?3. How many classes are there in each level? 4. When do children start Grade I?- Lead Ss to the new lesson: “write a paragraph on the formal school education system in Vietnam”

Pre-writing: (15 minutes)- Teacher introduces the task: In about 150 words, write a paragraph on the formal school education system in Vietnam, using the information given in Speaking Tasks on page 47. You may follow the suggestions below: - Levels of education: primary (5 years; start from the age of 6) lower secondary (4 years) upper secondary (3 years)

- Work in pairs, discuss and find out the answers.1- 32- Primary: 5 years/Lower secondary- 4 years/ upper secondary - 3 years

- Understand the aim of the lesson.

- Study the task carefully.- Work in pairs to give outlines

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

79

Page 80: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Compulsory education: 9 years (primary & lower secondary) - The academic year: 35 weeks (9 months, from September to May) - School terms: 2 terms: term 1 (Sept - Dec.), term 2 (Jan. - May) - Time of the national examination for GCSE (early June)- Guide Ss to write. 1. Topic Sentence 2. Supporting Details 3. Closing Sentence- Walk round the class to give Ss assistance. While-writing: (20 minutes)- Ask Ss to write - Call on some Ss to read out their writing in front of the class.- Ask Ss to exchange their writings for peer correction- Correct mistakes.Suggested answer. The formal school system in Vietnam consists of two levels of education, primary and secondary education. The children start Grade/ Year 1 at the age of 6 and they normally complete the primary education at the age of 10. They move to lower secondary school to study in Grade 6 when they are eleven years old. They will finish nine-year compulsory education when they complete Grade 9 at the age of 14. The children may go to upper secondary schools if they pass all the subjects tested at the end of Grade 9. They will stay there until they complete Grade 12 at the age of 17. If they want to sit for the entrance exam to universities or colleges they have to take the national examination for GCSE which takes place at the end of Mayor beginning of June. The academic year in Vietnam runs from September to May and is divided into two terms. The first term ends in January with

1. Topic Sentence The formal school system in Vietnam consists of two levels of education, primary and secondary education.

2. Supporting Details

3. Closing Sentence

- Use main ideas in the outline to write a paragraph on the formal school education system in Vietnam

- Exchange their writings for peer correction

- Correct mistakes.

- Read the paragraph

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

80

Page 81: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïnga week holiday and the second term finishes in May before a long summer holiday comes.Post- writing: (5 minutes)- Ask Ss to read the paragraph again.- Give remarks on the writing Homework: (2 minutes)- Rewrite the paragraph at home.- Prepare the section D (The Language focus part of Unit 4).

again- Correct mistakes

- Rewrite the paragraph at home.- Prepare the section D (The Language focus part of Unit 4).

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

81

Page 82: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 23 rd period Date : 22/9Grade 12

Theme: school education system Unit 4 Language FocusTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students know how to pronounce and

mark the stress in three-syllable words.2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: Students learn some information to fill in a form- Language:- New words: Words related to a form3. Skills: - Pronunciation: Stress in three-syllable words - Grammar: Passive voiceII. Method: Integrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Text books, IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (4 minutes)

- Write some three-syllable words on the board, and then pronounce those words aloud.

- Pay attention to its stress.- Ask Ss to read after1. algebra 2. carefully

- Listen to teacher- Read aloud- Pay attention to its stress.- Understand the aim of the new lesson.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

82

Page 83: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

3. politics4. physical5. computing6. compulsory 7. September

-How do we pronounce these words?- Read again these words and lead to the lesson- Today, we learn how to pronounce three-syllable words.I. Pronunciationa. Give Ss some rules of word stress in three-syllable words- Help students how to pronounce those words correctly by reading first as modelb. Practice:- Read the words first: clearly, correctly- Listen and correct their pronunciation if it’s needed- Let students read the sentences and work in groups- Listen and remark each group

II. Grammar: a) Review some grammar structures: Passive voice. S + to be + past participle- Give some examples- Ask Ss to make sentences with the structures.b. Practice:* Exercise 1: (10m’)- Introduce the task: Fill each blank with the simple present passive form of the verb in brackets.- Guide Ss to do- Ask Ss to fill each blank with the

- Listen and repeat from 2-3 times- Some of them stand and read words aloud- Practise in groups - Some groups compare with their results and read the words in sentences aloud

- The answers can be various- Listen and give more questions in pairs- Read the sentences in chorus aloud

- Understand the task- Fill each blank with

the simple present passive form of the verb in brackets.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

83

Page 84: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

simple present passive form of the verb in brackets.- Correct mistakes.

* Exercise 2: (10m’)- Introduce the task: Rewrite the following sentences using the passive voice. - Guide Ss to do- Ask Ss to rewrite the following sentences using the passive voice.- Correct mistakes.

Exercise 3. (10m’)- Introduce the task: Fill in the

spaces of the following passage with the correct tense in passive voice of the verbs in brackets.

- Guide Ss to do.- Ask Ss to fill in the spaces of

the following passage with the correct tense in passive voice of the verbs in brackets.

- Correct mistakes.

Answers:1. is separated2. is set - must be followed3. is made up4. is paid5. are selected

- Understand the task - Rewrite the following sentences using the passive voice.Answers: Exercise 21. this school was built in 19972. This dictionary was published in 18703. A surprise party is going to be organized by the students in my class tomorrow morning4. The kitchen is being painted now.5. “Romeo and Juliet” was written by Shakespeare in 1605 6. Shakespeare’s tragedies have been translated into many languages.7. A new primary school has just been built in my village.8. English will be spoken at the conference9. The floor hasn't been cleaned (by Jane) yet.10. The house will be repainted…..

Exercise 31. Was built 2. were sold3. has been made 4. can be bought5. are used. 6. can be used7. is stored 8. are

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

84

Page 85: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Homework: (2 minutes)- Assign homework- Do exercise ‘part E-language

focus in work book.

done9. must be told 10.can be done

- Do exercise ‘part E-language focus’ in work book.

The 24 th period Date : 24/ 9Grade 12 Theme: Correct the test

I. Objectives: After this correction students will be clearer about the test they have just done. And have to know how to try their best for the next test.II. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

85

Page 86: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngIII. Teaching aids: board, the test paper, key for the testIV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Greeting- Ask students some questions on the previous test- Tell the aim of the period: correct the test

I. Choose the word with underlined part pronounced differently from the rest (1 point ): (6 minutes) - Repeat the question- Get students to read the passage again carefully- Call some students to read out their answers, and the others give remarks if it is correct or not.- Finally read the keys out aloudII. Fill in each gap with one word from the table, there are more words than needed ( 2 points): (6 minutes)- Repeat the question- Get student to read the test again carefully- Call some students to read out their answers, and the others give remarks if it is correct or not- Finally read the keys out aloudIII. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct tenses (2 points): (6 minutes)- Repeat the question

- Greeting- Listen and understand the task- Get ready for the lesson

- Look at their paper- Compare the resutls with the others- Get the correct answers from the keys

- Look at their paper- Compare the results with the others- Get the correct answers from the keys

- Look at the writing Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

86

Page 87: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Get students to read the writing again carefully- Call some students to write their answers on the board, and the others give remarks if it is correct or not- Finally read the keys out aloudKeys:IV. Change the following sentences into reported speech beginning with given words (1 point): (6 minutes) - Repeat the question- Show the listening script on the board or read the passage again several times- Get students toread the passage again carefully- Call some students to write their answers on the board, and the others give remarks if it is correct or not- Finally read the keys out aloudV. Read the passage carefully and choose the correct answer ( 2 points) (6 minutes) - Repeat the question- Show the listening script on the board or read the passage again several times- Get students toread the passage again carefully- Call some students to write their answers on the board, and the others give remarks if it is correct or not- Finally read the keys out aloud

again and compare it with the others- Correct the wrong sentences base on the key

- Look at the writing again and compare it with the others- Correct the wrong sentences base on the key

- Look at the writing again and compare it with the others- Correct the wrong sentences base on the key

- Listen to the teacher’s reading carefully

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

87

Page 88: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngVI. Write a short paragraph ( 80 words) about your family using the suggestions below(2 points) (6 minutes)- Repeat the question- Show the listening script on the board or read the passage again several times- Get students toread the passage again carefully- Call some students to write their answers on the board, and the others give remarks if it is correct or not- Finally read the keys out aloudHomework: (4 minutes)Prepare Unit 5: Higher education

- Try to get the correct answers- Compare with the other classmates- Compare with the keys

- Prepare Unit 5: Higher education

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

88

Page 89: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Unit 5: HIGHER EDUCATIONThe 25 th period Date: 25/9Grade 12

Theme: HIGHER EDUCATIONUnit 5ReadingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students should know about their first

impressions of university life.2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: Students know about higher education- Language: verbs in past tense- New words: Words related to higher education3. Skills: • Vocabulary comprehension matching

• Passage comprehension • Arranging the sequence of an event

II. Method: Integrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Student’s book and pictures showing farmers’ daily routines, etc.IV. Procedure:Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Ask Ss some questions:1. What are you going to do after you finish high school?2. Which university would you

- Work in pairs, discuss and answer the questions

- Stand up and tell the Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

89

Page 90: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïnglike to attend?3. Where will you live if you study at a university far from your house?- Get feedback - Lead Ss to the new lesson: higher education Before you read : (7 minutes)- Ask Ss to work in pairs, ask and answer the following questions:1. How do you say in English the names of these universities? 2. What university would you like to apply for and why?- Get feedback.- Give Ss suggested answers.

While you read : (23 minutes)- Ask students to look through the passage and read in silence- Help students read the passage- Explain pronunciation and meaning of new words which appear in the passageTask 1 : (3 minutes)- Introduce the task: Complete the following sentences, using the right forms of the words in the box.- Ask Ss to complete the following sentences, using the right forms of the words in the box. - Go around class and help Ss if they need.- Call on Ss to give their

class the answers.- Understand the aim of

the lesson: Unit 5: higher education

- Work in pairs, ask and answer the questions1. Hue University2. Hanoi University of Architecture3. Hanoi University of Natural Science4. I would like to apply for Hanoi University of Natural Science.

- Read the text in silence.

- Find out new words.- Understand the aim of

the text.- Do the tasks that

follow.

Task1:- Study the task

carefully.- Choose the right word

to fill in the blanks.- Exchange their answers

for peer correction.- Tell the class the

answers.1. campus2. blamed3. scariest4. challenges

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

90

Page 91: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïnganswers.- Correct mistakes.

Task 2: (4 minutes)- Introduce the task: Find out who:a. attended a party on the first weekend at college. b. didn't get on very well with the roommate. c. was not used to meeting different people every day at college. d. liked having a chance to be creative. e. was very excited about going to college. f. enjoyed the first year at college. - Go around class and help Ss if they need.- Call on Ss to give their answers.- Correct mistakes.Task 3: (10minutes)- Introduce the task: Answer the following questions. 1. What did Sarah do on the first weekend? 2. Why did Sarah feel so lonely at the party? 3. What problems did Ellen have with her roommate? 4. What did Brenden think about his first year at college? 5. What does the social calendar of the colleges provide him?- Guide Ss to answer.

5. amazing.

- Look at the task, read the text again to give the answers.

Sarah: 1- a. attended a party on the first weekend at college.2- e. was very excited about going to college.Ellen: 3- b. didn't get on very well with the roommate.4. c. was not used to meeting different people every day at college.Brenden: 5- d. liked having a chance to be creative.6- f. enjoyed the first year at college.

- Understand the task.- Read the text again,

answer the questions on the text.1. She went out with

her new friends, walking around the campus.

2. Because at the party everyone was busy playing some games and no one seemed to noticed her.

3. Her roommate left the window open when it was cold outside. She went to bed early. She

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

91

Page 92: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Go round the class to help Ss if necessary. - Call on some Ss to give their answers.- Correct mistakes

Home work: (2 minutes)- Ask students to read the passage again.- Ask students to do Reading exercise of Unit 5 in workbook and prepare Part B : Speaking at home

blamed Ellen for making her sick.

4. Brenden thought the first year at college was the best and most challenging of his life.

5. It provides him plenty of opportunities to meet non-engineering students as well as other engineers and many of them have become his best friends.

-Do Reading exercise of Unit 5 in workbook and prepare Part B : Speaking at home

The 26 th period Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

92

Page 93: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngDate : 27/ 9 Grade 12

Theme: higher education Unit 5SpeakingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: By the end of the lesson, students will be

able to talking about the application process to tertiary institutions in Vietnam

2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: Students know how to talk about school;

make an interview and reporting on results- Language: words related to higher education 3. Skill: speaking about school life of students fluentlyII. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: textbook, board, rising questions, hand-outsIV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (2m’)- Show Ss some

documents requiring for tertiary institutions and ask them what they are.

- Call on some Ss to answer.

Pre-speaking: (10m’)- Teacher introduces the task1: Below are the admission requirements for tertiary institutions in some countries. Work in groups. Tick () those which are obligatory for you to be admitted to a university in Vietnam.

- Answer the questions1. an application form2. an identity card3. a reference letter4. a birth certificate

- Work in groups, tick () those which are obligatory for you to be admitted to a university in Vietnam.

- Stand up tell the class their answers.

- Others listen and compare with their ticks.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

93

Page 94: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng1. an application form 2. an identity card 3. a reference letter 4. a copy of the originals of your school certificate 5. a birth certificate 6. a copy of the record of your performance at school scores of the required entrance examination- Call on some Ss to tell their answers.- Listen and correct pronunciation mistakes.While-speaking: (20 minutes)Task 2- Teacher introduces the task “Work in pairs. Ask and answer the questions about the application process to tertiary study in Vietnam using the following cues”.- Guide Ss to practice:E.g. A- When do you fill in and send the application form? B- In March- Have Ss to ask and answer in pairs.- Go around and provide help if necessary.- Correct mistakes.Post-speaking: (10 minutes)- Teacher introduces the

task: Task 3. Work in groups. Discuss the process of applying to a tertiary institution in

- Understand - Work in pairs. Ask and answer the questions about the application process to tertiary study in Vietnam using the cues- Stand up, ask and answer about the application process to tertiary study in Vietnam.- Others listen and check the pronunciation.

- Understand the task.- Work in groups. Discuss the

process of applying to a tertiary institution in Vietnam.

Answer: In order to be admitted to a university in Vietnam, all students have to following the process of applying. During March, they have to fill in the application form and send it to the university they choose in March. After passing the GCSE examination held in May, all students are able to

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

94

Page 95: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Vietnam.- Guide Ss to discuss the

process of applying to a tertiary institution in Vietnam.

- Go around and provide help if necessary.

- Correct mistakes.

Homework: (3 minutes)- Ask students to write about the process of applying to a tertiary institution in Vietnam.

sit for the entrance examination in July. Successful candidates will be sent a letter of acceptance from the university. All students have to do now is to prepare all required papers to be officially accepted of that university.

- Do homework.- Prepare part C listening.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

95

Page 96: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 27 th period Date : 30/ 9Grade 12

Theme: HIGHER EDUCATIONUnit 5ListeningTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students should know about the problems

they may have when studying in a new school

2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Students learn more about the problems they may have when studying in a new school- New words: Words related to higher education3. Skills: - Listening and deciding on True or False statementsII. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Student’s book, tape and cassette playerIV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes) Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

96

Page 97: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng-Give Ss a question to discuss: “Talk about the problems you may have when studying in a new school.”Pre-listening: (7 minutes)- Ask students to look at the part: Before listening- Read loudly the words:Proportion; majority; tutorial; international; available; appointment ; Agricultural; rural; thoroughly.- Walk round, listen and help students- Ask students to repeat loudly the words- Listen and check pronunciation

While-listening: (20 minutes)Task 1- Introduce the task: Listen to

the conversation between John and David and circle the best option (A, B, C or D) to complete the following sentences.

- Ask students to read the questions quickly.- Guide students the requests of the task.- Read the conversation twice - call some students to give their answers.- Read the conversation the

third time for Ss to correct.Key: 1-C; 2-A; 3-C; 4-A; 5-B

After-listening: (10

- Work in pairs; discuss the problems they may have when studying in a new school.

- Read loudly the words:Proportion; majority; tutorial; international; available; appointment ; Agricultural; rural ;thoroughly.- Understand those words.

- Read the questions quickly.- Listen to the listening script.- Answer the questions.

Answer:

1-C; 2-A; 3-C; 4-A; 5-B

- Work in pairs. Ask and answer the question:

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

97

Page 98: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngminutes)- Ask Ss to work in pairs. Ask and answer the question: "Would you prefer to do an undergraduate course abroad or in your country?” Explain your choice. - Guide Ss to do.- Call some Ss to practice

asking and answering the question.

E.g.A. Would you like to do an undergraduate course abroad or in your country?B. I would like to do an undergraduate course in my country.A. Why?B. Because my English is not very good and I cannot afford tuition fees and accommodation for studying oversea.

Homework: (3 minutes) - Assign homework. - Prepare the section C (The Writing part of Unit 5).

"Would you prefer to do an undergraduate course abroad or in your country?”- Stand up and speak out.E.g.A. Would you like to do an undergraduate course abroad or in your country?B. I would like to do an undergraduate course in my country.A. Why?B. Because my English is not very good and I cannot afford tuition fees and accommodation for studying oversea.

- Prepare the section C (The Writing part of Unit 5).

The 28 th period Date : 01/10Grade 12

Theme: HIGHER EDUCATION Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

98

Page 99: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Unit 5 Writing Time: 45 minutesI. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students learn how to write a letter of

request to UCAS to ask for the information about the admission requirements to the university

2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Students will be able to write a letter of

request- New words: Words relating to higher education.3. Skill : II. Method: Integrated mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Textbook, board markersIV. Procedure:Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Note

sWarm-up :(3 minutes)- Ask students some questions

about how to write a letter of request.

- Give feedback and lead Ss to new lesson.

Pre-writing: (15 minutes)- Teacher introduces the task: You want to apply for an undergraduate programme in a university in England. Write a letter of request (about 150 words) to UCAS to ask for the information about the admission requirements to the university, using information in the Reading and Speaking section on page 52 & 56. You may follow the outline below: - Guide Ss to write outlines. a) Introduction: - State the reasons why you are

- Work in pairs, discuss and find out the answers.1- 32- Primary: 5 years/Lower secondary- 4 years/ upper secondary - 3 years

- Understand the aim of the lesson.

- Study the task carefully.- Work in pairs to give outlinesa) Introduction: - State the reasons why you are writing, your

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

99

Page 100: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngwriting, your interest in tertiary study in England (mention the name of the programme/the universities/ ... ) b) Request: - State what information you would like them to provide: tuition fee, accommodation, exams, Further information: - Say you would be happy to supply further information about yourself such as your English proficiency and record of secondary education study, ... c) Conclusion: - End with a polite closing. - Walk round the class to give Ss assistance.

While-writing: (20 minutes)- Ask Ss to write - Call on some Ss to read out their writing in front of the class.- Ask Ss to exchange their writings for peer correction- Correct mistakes.Suggested answer. 475/57 Le thanh Ton St. District 1Ho Chi Minh CityMarch 15th, 2008Dear sir/madam,I’ve read a lot about tertiary study in the UK and very impressed by the reputation of many famous universities there. Now I am tin last year of the high school and will

interest in tertiary study in England (mention the name of the programme/the universities/ ... ) b) Request: - State what information you would like them to provide: tuition fee, accommodation, exams, Further information: - Say you would be happy to supply further information about yourself such as your English proficiency and record of secondary education study, ... c) Conclusion: - End with a polite closing. - Walk round the class to give Ss assistance.

- Use main ideas in the outline to write a letter of request (about 150 words) to UCAS to ask for the information about the admission requirements to the university - Exchange their writings for peer correction

- Correct mistakes.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

100

Page 101: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngfinish secondary education in 3 months. I am very much interested in an undergraduate course in economics in Birmingham University. Could you please send me some information about the admission requirements, tuitions fees, accommodation and details of the course? I am ready to supply any information about myself if necessary.I look forward to hearing from you soon.Yours faithfully,Hoang Thanh Nam.Post- writing: (5 minutes)- Ask Ss to read the letter again.- Give remarks on the writing Homework: (2 minutes)- Rewrite the letter at home.- Prepare the section D (The Language focus part of Unit 4).

- Read the letter again- Correct mistakes

- Rewrite the letter at home.- Prepare the section D (The Language focus part of Unit 5).

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

101

Page 102: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 29 th period Date : 04/ 10Grade 12

Theme: HIGHER EDUCATIONUnit 5

Language Focus Time: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students know how to pronounce and

mark the stress in words more than three-syllable.

2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: Students learn some information to fill in a form- New words: Words related to a form3. Skills: - Pronunciation: Stress in words more than three-syllable - Grammar: Conditional sentencesII. Method: Integrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Text books, IV. Procedures:

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

102

Page 103: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (4 minutes)

- Write some more than three-syllable words on the board, and then pronounce those words aloud.

- Pay attention to its stress.- Ask Ss to read after

o economics o psychology o philosophy o engineering o sociology o mathematics o geographical o archeology

-How do we pronounce these words?- Read again these words and lead to the lesson- Today, we learn how to pronounce more than three-syllable words.I. Pronunciationa. Give Ss some rules of word stress in more than three-syllable words- Help students how to pronounce those words correctly by reading first as modelb. Practice:- Read the words first: clearly, correctly- Listen and correct their pronunciation if it’s needed- Let students read the sentences and work in groups- Listen and remark each groupII. Grammar: a) Review some grammar

- Listen to teacher- Read aloud- Pay attention to its stress.- Understand the aim of the new lesson.- Listen and repeat from 2-3 times- Some of them stand and read words aloud- Practise in groups - Some groups compare with their results and read the words in sentences aloud

- The answers can be various- Listen and give more questions in pairs- Read the sentences in chorus aloud

- Understand the taskAnswers: 1. If you fail the GCSE examination, you will not

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

103

Page 104: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

structures: conditional sentences- Give some examples- Ask Ss to make sentences with the structures.b. Practice:* Exercise 1: (10m’)- Introduce the task: Complete the sentences using conditional sentence type I.- Guide Ss to do- Ask Ss to complete the sentences using conditional sentence type I.- Correct mistakes.

* Exercise 2: (10m’)- Introduce the task: Express these situations using conditional sentence type II.- Guide Ss to do- Ask Ss to express these situations using conditional sentence type II.- Correct mistakes.

be allowed to take the entrance examination to the university. 2. You won't be able to get into the exanimation room if you are 10 minutes late. 3. If you don't send the application form on time, you will not be able / allowed to take the entrance exam. 4. If you don't have a reference letter, you won't be able / allowed to submit your application form. 5. Unless you show your identity card you won't be able / allowed to get into the examination room.

- Understand the task - Do the exercise. - Correct mistakesAnswers:1. She doesn't have a car. She doesn't go out in the evening. If she had a car, she would go out in the evening. 2. Sarah doesn't study hard. She hates school. If Sarah liked school, she would study hard. 3. I can't do the test. It is too difficult. I would/ could do the test if it was/were not too

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

104

Page 105: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Exercise 3. (10m’)- Introduce the task: Complete

the sentences with the correct form of the verbs in brackets.

- Guide Ss to do.- Ask Ss to complete the

sentences with the correct form of the verbs in brackets.

- Correct mistakes.

Homework: (2 minutes)- Assign homework- Do exercise ‘part E-language

focus in work book.- Prepare Unit 6: FUTURE JOBS

difficult. 4. Peter doesn't read a lot. He can't find the time. Peter would read a lot if he found the time/had more time.5. I can't translate this. I don't speak Korean. If I spoke Korean, I could translate this. 6. They don't travel far a lot. They are afraid of flying. If they weren't afraid of flying, they would travel far a lot.

- Understand the task - Do the exercise. - Correct mistakesAnswers:1. If John had passed the GCSE examination, he would have been allowed to take the entrance examination to the university. 2. If you had sent the application on time, they might have called you for an interview. I can't understand why you didn't. 3. If John had installed an alarm, the thieves wouldn't have broken into his house. 4. I would have made a film with him if I had been

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

105

Page 106: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

a famous director, but I was not. 5. If you had told me earlier I would have given it to you. 6. We would have sent you a Christmas card if we had had your address.

- Do exercise ‘part E-language focus’ in work book.- Prepare Unit 6: FUTURE JOBS

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

106

Page 107: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Unit 6 FUTURE JOBS

The 30 th period Date: 06/ 10Grade 12 Theme: FUTURE JOBS

Unit 6 ReadingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students should know about preparing

for a job interview.2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: Students know about future jobs- New words: Words related to future jobs3. Skills: - Guessing meaning from context

- Reading for specific informationII. Method: Integrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Student’s book and pictures showing farmers’ daily routines, etc.IV. Procedure:Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Ask Ss some questions:1. Tell the class some jobs you know?2. Which job would you like to be in the future? Why?- Get feedback - Lead Ss to the new lesson:

- Work in pairs, discuss and answer the questions

- Stand up and tell the class the answers.

- Understand the aim of the lesson: Unit 6:

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

107

Page 108: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngfuture jobs Before you read : (7 minutes)- Ask Ss to work in groups. Tick () the factors that they think would help them succeed in a job interview. • wearing casual clothes • giving clear, honest answers • feeling self-confident • feeling nervous • having a good sense of humour • avoiding difficult questions - Get feedback.- Give Ss suggested answers.While you read : (23 minutes)- Ask students to look through the passage and read in silence- Help students read the passage- Explain pronunciation and meaning of new words which appear in the passageTask 1 : (7 minutes)- Introduce the task: These words are from the passage. Look back to the text and circle the best meanings A, B or C.- Ask Ss to circle the best meanings A, B or C.- Go around class and help Ss if they need.- Call on Ss to give their answers.- Correct mistakes.

Task 2: (10minutes)- Introduce the task: Work in

future jobs

- Work in groups. Tick () the factors that they think would help them succeed in a job interview.

E.g. - avoiding difficult questions - giving clear, honest answers - feeling self-confident

- Read the text in silence.

- Find out new words.- Understand the aim of

the text.- Do the tasks that

follow.

Task1:- Study the task

carefully.- Choose the right option

to finish the task.- Exchange their answers

for peer correction.- Tell the class the

answers.6. B7. C8. A9. B

- Look at the task, read Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

108

Page 109: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngpairs. Decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F). 1. Try to reduce the feeling of pressure and make a good impression on your interviewer. 2. Find out as much information as you can about the job and the vacancy.3. Bring with you a letter of application and your resumes to the interview. 4. Take all your certificates and letters of recommendation with you. 5. Remember to dress neatly and formally. 6. Your voice should be clear and polite. 7. Tell the interviewer about your shortcomings. 8. Remember to say goodbye to the interviewer before leaving the interview. - Go around class and help Ss if they need.- Call on Ss to give their answers.- Correct mistakes.Post reading- Introduce the task: Work in groups. Discuss the question: Which pieces of advice given in the passage do you find most useful and least useful? Why? - Guide Ss to answer.- Go round the class to help Ss if necessary. - Call on some Ss to give their answers.

the text again to give the answers.

- Understand the task.- Read the text again,

decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F).

- Answers: 1-F; 2-T; 3-F; 4-T; 5-T; 6-F; 7-F; 8-T

- Answer the following questions:1. What do you prepare

for a job interview?2. What should we do

and shouldn’t do before, during and after an interview?

-Do Reading exercise of Unit 5 in workbook and prepare Part B : Speaking at home

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

109

Page 110: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Correct mistakesHome work: (2 minutes)- Ask students to read the passage again.- Ask students to do Reading exercise of Unit 5 in workbook and prepare Part B : Speaking at home

The 31 st Period Date: 08/ 10 Grade 12

Theme: future jobs Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

110

Page 111: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Unit 6SpeakingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students should know to giving opinions about jobs2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Students learn about opinions about jobs- Language: Talking about opinions about jobs.- New words: words related to opinions about jobs3. Skills: talking about opinions about jobsII. Method: integrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: pictures IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Notes

Warm-up: (5 minutes)- Ask Ss some questions about

jobs:1. Would you like to work

as a teacher?2. What do you think

about teaching job?- Get feedback.- Lead Ss to new lesson.Pre-speaking : (12 minutes)Task 1- Introduce the task: Work in pairs. Match a job in A with at least two descriptions in B.A B- a doctor - a farmer - a tourist

• take care of people's health • create imaginary characters and events • find good and safe hotels for customers

- Listen to the questions.

- Discuss the question.- Stand up, answer the

questions.

- Work in pairs.- Match a job in A with at least two descriptions in B.Example: A: a doctorB: • take care of people's health• help save people's lives

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

111

Page 112: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngguide - a writer

• take people to places of interest • construct irrigation systems • apply new farming techniques • help save people's lives • tell stories through pictures

- Ask Ss to match a job in A with at least two descriptions in B.- Go around class and help Ss if they need.- Call on Ss to give their answers.- Correct mistakes.While-speaking : (15 minutes)Task 2 - Introduce the task: Task2. Work in pairs. Discuss which of the jobs in column A you would/would not like to do. Explain why/why not? You can use the cues in column B. A Bpilot waiter taxi driver electrician policeman journalist hotel receptionist computer programmer

boring rewarding difficult interesting fascinating dangerous challenging fantastic

- Guide students how to practise.- Ask students to work in pairs.- Help the students with new structures.

- In turn, stand up and practice.

- Understand the task- Work in pairs. Discuss which of the jobs in column A they would/would not like to do. Explain why/why not? use the cues in column B.

Example: I would like to work as a doctor. Working as a doctor would be fascinating job because I would have a chance to take care of people health.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

112

Page 113: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Walk around and help them.- Call some student to stand up and report before the class.- Correct their mistakesExample: I would like to work as a doctor. Working as a doctor would be fascinating job because I would have a chance to take care of people health. Post-speaking : (10 minutes)Task 3-Teacher introduces the task: Task3. Work in groups. Talk about a job you may do after you finish school, using the following cues. • Where you will work • Who you will work with • The salary you may get paid • The working conditions - Let them work in groups- Ask some students to stand up and tell loudly- Walk round and help them- Listen and correct mistakes

Homework: (3 minutes)- Assign homework. - Ask students to prepare Part C- Listening and do homework

- Work in groups. Talk about a job they may do after they finish school.

Example: I would like to work as a tourist guide. It would be a challenging and fascinating job because I would have a chance to travel all over Vietnam and meet many interesting people. If I work for a foreign tourist company, I can get high salary and improve my English speaking and listening skills. Also, I am a sociable and confident person and I can work hard for a long time so I want to work far away from home to know more about the world around me.

- Listen to the teacher- Write down the homework

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

113

Page 114: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 32 nd period Date : 10/ 10Grade 12

Theme: future jobsUnit 6ListeningTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students should know about future jobs

and recent changes in job market.2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Students learn more about jobs- New words: Words related to future jobs3. Skills: - Filling in missing information

- Deciding on True or False statements II. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Student’s book, tape and cassette playerIV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Notes Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

114

Page 115: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngWarm-up: (5 minutes)-Give Ss a question to discuss: Which is the most popular job in Vietnam?- Get feedback- Lead Ss to new lesson. E.g. Accountant nurse lawyer teacher computer programmer….Pre-listening: (7 minutes)- Ask students to look at the part: Before listening- Read loudly the words:workforce

manufacturing retail service category goods job market

economy wholesale- Walk round, listen and help students- Ask students to repeat loudly the words- Listen and check pronunciationWhile-listening: (20 minutes)Task 1- Introduce the task: Task 1. Listen to the passage and fill in the missing words in the boxes. - Ask students to read the questions quickly.- Guide students the requests of the task.- Call some students to give their answers.- Read the passage the third

time for Ss to correct.Key:

- Discuss and answer the questions

- E.g. Accountant nurse lawyer teacher computer programmer….

- Read loudly the words:workforce

manufacturing retail service category goods job market economy wholesale

- Understand those words.

- Read the questions quickly.- Listen to the listening script.- Answer the questions.

Answer:1- manufacturing2- service 3- transportation4- finance 5- service

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

115

Page 116: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng1- manufacturing2- service 3- transportation4- finance 5- service Task 2- Introduce the task: Task 2. Listen again and decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F). 1. American workers have changed from manufacturing jobs to service jobs. 2. Manufacturing jobs are jobs in which workers make something. 3. Personal services are one of the five service jobs.4. 70% of workers produced goods one hundred years ago. 5. 80% of workers will work in the service sector by the year 2020. - Read the passage again.- Ask Ss to decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F).- Go round the class, give help to Ss if they need.- Call some Ss to give the answers.- Read the passage the last time to check their answers.Suggested answers:1- T 2- T 3- T 4- F 5- FAfter-listening: (5 minutes)- Work in groups. Summarize the passage using the information in Tasks 1 and 2. - Guide Ss to do.

- Read the statements quickly.- Listen to the listening script.- Answer the questions.

Answers:1- T 2- T 3- T 4- F 5- F

- Work in groups. Summarize the passage using the information in Tasks 1 and 2.

- Prepare the section D (The Writing part of Unit 5).

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

116

Page 117: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Call some Ss to summarize

the passage

Homework: (3 minutes) - Assign homework. - Prepare the section D (The Writing part of Unit 6).

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

117

Page 118: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 33 th period Date : 12/ 10 Grade 12

Theme: future jobsUnit 6

WritingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students learn how to understand a

formal letter2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Students will be able to write a formal

letter of job application- Language- New words: Words relating to job application3. Skill : II. Method: Integrated mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Textbook, board markersIV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Notes

Warm-up :(3 minutes)- Raise a picture of a beauty spot (

Keo Pagoda in Vu Thu Thai Binh) and ask Ss some questions:

- 1. Where is it?- 2. What is it famous for?- 3. Do you want to work as a

tourist guide here?- 4. What qualification do you

need?- Get feedback.- Lead Ss to the new lesson: “Writing a formal letter of job application”Pre-writing: (15 minutes)- Teacher introduces the task: Task

- Work in pairs, answer the questions.- Understand the aim of the lesson.- The new lesson: “Writing a formal letter of job application”

- Work in pairs. Read the Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

118

Page 119: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng1. Work in pairs. Read the following advertisement and fill in the notes. English-speaking Tour Guides WantedWe are a travel company managing holiday tours. We need English-speaking local guides to accompany foreign visitors on trips throughout Vietnam. If you have a high school diploma, have experience as a tour guide, a good manner, speak fluent English and are willing to work hard for long hours, please contact: The Manager, Vinatour, 450 Nguyen Du Street, Hanoi. Telephone No: 04 824 0139. • Type of job: …………………• Level of education needed: ……………• Work experience: ……………………• Character and interests: …………………

- Guide Ss to fill in the notes. - Walk round the class to give Ss assistance. While-writing: (20 minutes)- Teacher introduces the task: Task 2 Write a letter to Vinatour, applying for the job mentioned in the advertisement in Task 1. Your letter should include the following details. • Your name, address and date of writing • Name and address of the company • Greeting • Introduction: say where you saw the advertisement and why you are writing the letter of application • Body: mention your education, work experience and your

following advertisement and fill in the notes.

English-speaking Tour Guides WantedWe are a travel company managing holiday tours. We need English-speaking local guides to accompany foreign visitors on trips throughout Vietnam. If you have a high school diploma………….Answers:

1. Tour guide2. high school diploma3. experience as a tour

guide, fluent English4. a good manner,

willing to work hard for long hours

- Study the task carefully.- Work in pairs to give outlines- Base on the outline write a letter to Vinatour, applying for the job mentioned in the advertisement in Task 1.- Exchange their writing for peer correction.- Read out the letter.- Correct mistakes.

Flat 3,324, Ly Thuong Kiet Street, Hanoi 16, October, 2004.

Hanoi Vinatour

250, Nguyen Du Street, Hanoi

Dear Sir or Madam,

I am writing in reply to your advertisement in the Vietnam

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

119

Page 120: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngcharacter / interests • Conclusion: express your willingness to work for the company and when you are available for interview • Closing - Guide Ss to write outlines. - Ask Ss to write - Call on some Ss to read out their writing in front of the class.- Ask Ss to exchange their writings for peer correction- Correct mistakes.Suggested answer. Post- writing: (5 minutes)- Ask Ss to read the letter again.- Give remarks on the writing

Homework: (2 minutes)- Rewrite the letter at home.- Prepare the section E (The Language focus part of Unit 6).

News for experienced English-speaking local guides to accompany foreign visitors on trips throughout Vietnam.

I think I meet all of the qualifications that you specify. I was awarded High School Certificate two years ago. After leaving high school, I worked as an accountant in a small travel agency for one year, where I was given a training course on tourism. Then I had one year of experience as a tour guide so I know many tourist areas in Vietnam arid have a basic knowledge of Vietnamese culture, history and geography. I speak English fluently. In addition, I am a sociable and confident person and can work hard for long hours. I would like to work for you and would appreciate the opportunity to discuss this position with you in person.

I am looking forward to hearing from you at your convenience.

Yours faithfully, Nguyen Quoc Anh

- Rewrite the letter at home.- Prepare the section E (The Language focus part of Unit 6).

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

120

Page 121: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 34 th period Date : 14/ 10 Grade 12

Theme: future jobsLesson 6 Language FocusTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students know how to pronounce weak/strong forms of some conjunctions & prepositions 2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: Students learn some information to fill in a form Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

121

Page 122: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Language:- New words: Words related to a form3. Skills: - Pronunciation: weak/strong forms of some conjunctions & prepositions - Grammar: Relative clausesII. Method: Integrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Text books, IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (4 minutes)

- Write some words on the board, and then pronounce those words aloud.

- Pay attention to its weak/strong forms.

- Ask Ss to read afterI. Pronunciation - Ask Ss to look at this table.- Read the words and their weak

and strong form.- Ask Ss to read after.- Call some Ss to read seats

- Help students how to pronounce those words correctly by reading first as modelb. Practice: Practise reading these sentences1. What are you looking at? 2. I want to go but I don't know when. 3. She bought a book and two pens. 4. Thanks for coming. 5. Where is it from? 6. I'm from Hanoi. 7. She's the one I'm fond of. 8. First of all, I want to thank you for coming. 9. The letter was to him, not from him.

- Listen to teacher- Read aloud- Pay attention to its weak/ strong forms.- Understand the aim of the new lesson.

- Listen and repeat from 2-3 times- Some of them stand and read words aloud- Practise in groups - Some groups compare with their results and read the words in sentences aloud

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

122

Page 123: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

10. I want to ask you a question. - Read the words first: clearly, correctly- Listen and correct their pronunciation if it’s needed- Let students read the sentences and work in groups- Listen and remark each groupII. Grammar: a) Review some grammar structures: Relative clauses Whom; who; which; whoever; whose………- Give some examples- Ask Ss to make sentences with the structures.b. Practice:* Exercise 1: (10m’)- Introduce the task: Exercise 1. Add who, whoever, whose, whom or which to complete the following sentences. - Guide Ss to do- Ask Ss to fill each blank with who, whoever, whose, whom or which. - Correct mistakes.Suggested answers: 1. whom 2. which 3. Whoever 4. which 5. Which 6. Who 7. Whose 8. who 9. which 10. whom* Exercise 2: (10m’)- Introduce the task: Exercise 2. Join the following sentences in two ways. Example: 1. Look at the man. He is teaching in the classroom. a) Look at the man who is teaching in the classroom.

- The answers can be various- Listen and give more questions in pairs- Read the sentences in chorus aloud

- Understand the task- Fill each blank with

the simple present passive form of the verb in brackets.

Answers:1. is separated2. is set - must be followed3. is made up4. is paid5. are selected

- Understand the task - Rewrite the following sentences using the passive voice.Answers: Exercise 2

- Do exercise ‘part E-language focus’ in work book.- Prepare Unit 5: Higher education

1. I read a book that was written by a friend of mine. - I read a book written by

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

123

Page 124: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

b) Look at the man teaching in the classroom. - Guide Ss to do- Ask Ss to rewrite the following sentences using the passive voice.- Correct mistakes.1. I read a book that was written by a friend of mine. - I read a book written by a friend of mine. 2. A man who was carrying a lot of money in a box got on the bus. - A man carrying a lot of money in a box got on the bus. 3. In the street there were several people who were waiting for the shop to open. - In the street there were several people waiting for the shop to open. 4. Britain imports many cars which that were made in Japan. - Britain imports many cars made in Japan. 5. There are a lot of people in your office who want to talk to you. - There are a lot of people in your office wanting to talk to you. 6. The cowboy who had been wounded by an arrow fell off his horse. - The cowboy wounded by an arrow fell off ms horse. 7. Most of the people who were injured in the crash recovered quickly. - Most of the people injured in the crash recovered quickly. 8. John, who wished he hadn't come to the party, looked anxiously at his watch.

a friend of mine. 2. A man who was carrying a lot of money in a box got on the bus. - A man carrying a lot of money in a box got on the bus. 3. In the street there were several people who were waiting for the shop to open. - In the street there were several people waiting for the shop to open. 4. Britain imports many cars which that were made in Japan. - Britain imports many cars made in Japan. 5. There are a lot of people in your office who want to talk to you. - There are a lot of people in your office wanting to talk to you. 6. The cowboy who had been wounded by an arrow fell off his horse. - The cowboy wounded by an arrow fell off ms horse. 7. Most of the people who were injured in the crash recovered quickly. - Most of the people injured in the crash recovered quickly. 8. John, who wished he hadn't come to the party, looked anxiously at his watch.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

124

Page 125: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

- John, wishing he hadn't come to the party, looked anxiously at his watch. 9. The children who were playing football in the schoolyard were my students. - The children playing football in the schoolyard were my students. 10. Vietnam exports a lot of rice which is grown mainly in the south of the country. - Vietnam exports a lot of rice grown mainly in the south of the country.

Homework: (2 minutes)- Assign homework- Do exercise ‘part E-language

focus in work book.

- John, wishing he hadn't come to the party, looked anxiously at his watch. 9. The children who were playing football in the schoolyard were my students. - The children playing football in the schoolyard were my students. 10. Vietnam exports a lot of rice which is grown mainly in the south of the country. - Vietnam exports a lot of rice grown mainly in the south of the country.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

125

Page 126: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 35 th period Date : 16/ 10Grade 12 Test yourself B

I. Objectives: After this lesson, students will be able to:- Check themselves their skills in reading, speaking,

listening, writing.- Improve their knowledge through the test yourself.

II. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative.II. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, cassetteplayer, board, hand-outs…IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Greeting- Ask students something about the test yourself B* Have you prepared it at home?* Have you got any difficulties?

- Greeting- Answer teacher’s questions

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

126

Page 127: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngTest yourself

I. Listening(2.5 points) (10 minutes)- Present the task: Listen and complete the table below- Tell students the topic of the table- Get students to look through the table- Explain the meaning of new words- After that turn on the tape of the passage aloud twice- Let students fill in the blanks with the words they have just heard- Go round the class to control the work- Then turn on the tape of the passage the last time for students to check their results- Correct mistakes

II. Reading (2.5 points) (10 minutes)- Present the task: Read the passgae and fill in each blank with a suitable word from the box.- Get students to work in groups, discuss about the passage- Go round the class to control the discussion- State the best option- Correct mistakes

- Look at the book and listen to the task- understand the task- Listen to the tape carefully- Fill in the blanks with the words they’ve just heard- Correct mistakes

Keys:1. sorts of things, 2. learn at all, 3. things for themselves, 4. make them go,5. a certain age.

- Look at the textbook and listen to the teacher then read the passage and fill in each blank with a suitable word from the box.- Work in groups to discuss about the passage- Finish the task- Compare their results with the other groups, and correct.Keys:1. Final 6.Qualification

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

127

Page 128: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

III. Grammar(2.5 points) (8 minutes)- Recall the grammar.- Giude students how to do- Give them some newwords:- Do the first as an example.- Ask students to to the exercise.- Call the to to on board.- Go round the class to control the set’s activities- State the keys- Correct mistakes

IV. Writing(2.5 points) (7 minutes)- Giude students how to write- Give students some models and structures to writes..- Ask students to write.- Call the to to on board.- Go round the class to control the students’ activities- Correct mistakesHomework (5 minutes)

2. requirements 7.Grader3. when 8.Equivalent4. courses. 9. Count5. subjects 10. Who

- Listen to the teacher- Work in groups to complete the sentences- Compare the results with the other groups- Correct mistakesKeys:1. The widows have been cleaned2. A super market is going to built3. Lan is said to have won ....4. If you listen carefully, you will know what to do5. If I had a car, I would6. If we had brought a city map, we wouldn’t have ........- Listen to the teacher carefully.- Work in groups or in pairs then write.- Compare the results with the other groups.Dear .........- Correct mistakes

- Study all the lessons again- Get the knowledge

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

128

Page 129: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Ask students: + to study all the lessons again + to get ready for the 45 minute-test in the next period

ready for the coming test

The 36 th period Date : 18/ 10/ 2008

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

129

Page 130: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Test 2Grade: 12

Time limit: 45 minutes45 minute test 1

Full name :…………………………………….Class : ……………

Circle the best opitions to complete the following passage :Henry is probably the luckiest person I know. He is one of those rare people (1)……….job I would really like to have myself. Henry, who had always been interested (2)……….both science and animals, wanted to be a vet, and we were both students(3)………..university at the same time. When his course finished, he went to Aberdeen, where he looked after domestic animals (4)……..as cats and dogs. In addition, he is charge (5)……..a special program to protect species which are in danger of extinction.1A.who B.his C.who his D.whose2A.in B.at C.of D.for3A.of B.at C.studying D.on4A.like B.same C.such D.just5A.of B.with C.for D.atChoose the sentence that has the same meaning with the given sentence :6.My father stopped smoking two years ago.A. My father stopped smoking for two years.B.My father has stopped smoking two years ago.C.My father has stopped smoking two for years ago. D.My father has stopped smoking for two years7. He wore glasses and a false beard so that ____. A. anyone can recognize him C. no one can recognize him B. no one could recognize him D. no one couldn’t recognize him8.As soon as he waved his hand, she turned away.A.He saw her turn away and he waved his hand.B.No sooner had he waved his hand than she turned away.C.She turned away because he waved his hand too early.D.Although she turned away, he waved his hand.9.”Don’t put your feet on the chair,” my mother saidA.My mother said to me not to put your feet on the chair. Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

130

Page 131: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngB.My mother told me not to put my feet on the chair.C.My mother told me I did not put my feet on the chair.D.My mothey told me that I should put my feet on the chair.10.I might go camping. My friends have invited me.A.My friends have invited me to go camping. B.My friends have invited me go camping.C.My friends have invited me going camping. D.My friends have invited me that I might go camping.Choose the word that pronounced differently from the others :11A.laughs B.photographs C.machines

D.parents12A.planted B.liked C.needed

D.wanted13.A.humor B.honest C.human

D.horror14A.language B.success C.private

D.property15A.escape B.replace C.involve

D.countryChoose the best answer :16.Everything is going well.We………….any problem so far.A.didn’t have B.haven’t had C.hadn’t had

D.wasn’t having17.Look ! That man overthere…………..the same sweater as you.A.wears B.to wear C.is wearing

D.was wearing18.Lisa………..to work yesterday. She wasn’t feeling well.A.didn’t go B.hasn’t gone C.hadn’t gone D.hadn’t go19.Most of the guests………by the time we arrived at the reception.A.had left B.were left C.would left

D.have left20.When she returned home from work, she……….a bath.A.takes B.took C.has taken

D.was taking21.Did he tell you…………..?A.where could we meet him. B.we would be able to meet him where.C.where would be able to meet him. D.where we would meet him.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

131

Page 132: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng22.If Tan Son Nhat Airport………..clear of fog we will land there.A.is B.was C.will be D.could be23.Kate is a very…………girl. She can make friends easily even though she is in a strange place.A.shy B.unfriendly C.socible D.reticent24.You…………..better take off your wet shoes.A.should B.would C.had D.could25.Elvis Presley…………..in 1997.A.dies B.died C.is died D.was died26.His short stories,………..usually had unhappy endings, were collected and published.A.who B.which C.whom D.that27.His achivements were partly due to the………..of his wife.A.assis B.assisted C.assistant D.assistance28.Tommy………..for all the trouble had caused to us.A.complimented B.apologized C.excused D.complained29.There was a wealth of…………….evidence.A.supportive B.support C.supported

D.supporting30.My sister……………for you since yesterday.A.is looking B.was looking C.has been looking D.looked31.English is an important...........that is required in several national examination.A.language B.test C.evaluation D.subject32.Bicycles................in the driway.A.must not leave B.must be leaving C.must not left D.must not be left33.............................yet ?A.Have the letters been typed B.Have been the letters typedC.Have the letters typed D.Had the letters typed34.If I............ten years younger, I would apply for the job.A.am B.was C.were D.had been35.Ms Young, to.............many of her students are writing, is living happily in Canada.A.who B.whom C.that

D.whose36.I would like to know the reason...............he decided to quit the job.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

132

Page 133: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngA.why B.which C.that

D.when37.I have just called.................a job interview, I am so nervous.A.for B.in C.over D.with38...............................if a war happened ?A.What you would do B.What would you doC.What will you do D.What you will do39.If she................the train last night, she.................here now.A.took / were B.takes / will C.had taken / would have been D.had taken / would be40.Paul is so smart. He graduated...........the university in just three years.A.of B.at C.from D.to

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

133

Page 134: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

UNIT 7: economic reforms

The 37 th period Date : 20/ 10/ 2008Grade 12

Theme: economic reformsUnit 7ReadingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: - Students read and guess the meaning of words in contexts.

- They read and answer questions about the texts. - They practice scanning for specific information in the

texts.2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: The changes brought about by the economic reforms. - Language: Common knowledge of education, healthcare, agriculture,… - New words: Words related to the topic (economic, medical and agricultural terms).3. Skills: - Guessing meaning in context, scanning for specific information and passage comprehension.II. Method: - Integrated, mainly communicative.III. Teaching aids: -Picture, board, chalks, textbook, handouts,…IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

134

Page 135: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngAims: to introduce the topic of the lesson and to raise students' interest.- Tell the class the the differences between schools (hospitals, houses) now and the past ten years.- How do farmers transport their farming products now and how did they do ten years ago?- What make all of these changes?Before you read : (7 minutes)- Ask students (to work in pairs) to open their books, look at the pictures, and do the tasks that follow.+ What can you see..?+ Do you think…?+ What, in your opinion, should…?- Ask them to work in 3 minutes, meanwhile the teacher moves round to help if necessary. - Ask some pairs to report . - Give some remark if necessaryWhile you read : (23 minutes)- Ask students to look through the passage and read in silence- Help students read the passage- Explain pronunciation and meaning of new words which appear in the passage

- now: beautiful buildings, good facilities,..past: ….now: tractors, motorbikes, …past: human’s force or animal’s force.- the development of economic.

- Things seen: a village, farmers, a buffalo, some huts,…A poor village, of course the farmers lead a poor life.Build a new road, change the cultivation methods, …

- Listen to the teacher then read the passages - Ask some new words if necessary

- Read through the text find the new words, try to guess the meanings of those words in contexts: + National Congresses: §¹i héi toµn quèc+ renovation (n): ®æi míi

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

135

Page 136: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngTask 1 : (3 minutes)- Ask students to read through the text once to find out some new words, guess the main idea.- Explain new words (give the Vietnamese equivalents), guide the sts to get the main contents of the reading text.- Ask students to work individually in 3 minutes to do this task.- Guide students to read through the passage , then focus on only the sentences surrounding the suggested words to do the task effectively.- Give students some more words that may be new/ unfamiliar to them.- Guide the students to read the word in chorus and individually.

Task 2: (4 minutes)- Ask students to read the passage again and choose whether the statements given

+ under-developed (pp):¸chËm ph¸t triÓn+ inflation (n): l¹m ph¸t+ stagnant (adj): tr× trÖ+ government subsidies (n): sù bao cÊp cña chÝnh phñ+ government commitment (n): cam kÕt cña chÝnh phñ+ dissolve (v): tan r·+ substantial (adj): lín lao, ®¸ng kÓ- Get the meaning of some more words: + eliminate (v):….+ intervention (n):…..+ Vietnamese Communist Party+ measure (n):……+ promote (v):…..+ economic reforms (n):…..+ Land Law+ Enterprise Law

- Work individually to read the text then choose whether the statements given are true (T) or false (F).- Share the key with other sts.1. F 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. T- Find in the text the

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

136

Page 137: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngare true (T) or false (F).- Ask them to work individually to do the task and give the evidence to prove the keys.- Move round to make sure that all students are working and to help them if necessary.- Ask some students to report and give feedback.Task 3: (6 minutes)- Ask students to read the passage again then work in pairs to ask and answer the suggested questions.- Walk round the class to give help if necessary.

- Give suggested words, phrases or useful suggestions.

- Correct the students’ work.

evidence to prove the keys.

- Do the task in pairs:A: When and by whom was …?B: in 1986 by the Vietnamese Communist PartyA: What was the aim…?B: to restructure the economy of Vietnam, to Raise the living standard of the people.A: Name the renovation measures…?B: eliminated government subsidies. shifted economic priority…..of export. reduced state intervention in business. open trade relation…..the world. encourage foreign……investment.A: How has Vietnam changed…?B: productivity and agricultural export… farmers have enjoyed….. workers have

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

137

Page 138: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

After you read : (8 minutes)- Ask students to work in group to scan the text again.- Ask them to work in small groups of three or four to talk about the text based on the suggested points.- Encourage them to use their own words.- Ask one or two pairs to report.

Home work: (2 minutes) - Write a passage to say what changes you’ve seen in your village since the year 1986. compare to the past.

worked harder. children, especially from …, … training.A: What do we believe?B: We believe that with the …..

VN before DM: economy under-developed – country and poor people – production stagnant – shortage of schools, hospitals – inflation.Renovation measures:eliminated government subsidies - shifted economic priority…..of export - reduced state intervention in business - open trade relation…..the world - encourage foreign……investment.VN since DM: productivity and agricultural export -farmers have enjoyed…..- workers have worked harder. children, especially from …, … training.

- Listen to the teacher- Write down the homework to do at home.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

138

Page 139: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 38 th Period Date: 22/ 10/ 2008Grade 12 Theme: economic reforms

Unit 7 SpeakingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: - Students work in pairs to describe the pictures. - Students talk about measures and effects of the economic reforms in Fantasia.2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Economic reforms. - Language: + The way to make suggestions or predictions. + The tenses.

- New words: words related to economic reforms.3. Skills: - Discribing details in pictures. - Talking about changes the new economic reform has brought about.II. Method: - Integrated, mainly communicative.III. Teaching aids: - Pictures, board, chalks, textbook, handouts.IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Notes

Warm-up: (5 minutes)Tell a short story to prove that the renovation measures has apparently changed the social and people’s lives positively.

Listen and give one’s own ideas or story if being asked.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

139

Page 140: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngPre-speaking : (12 minutes)Task 1- Explain the requirements clearly in English “in your textbook, there are four pictures. Now, what I would like you to do is to look at them carefully and say what they are about”- Ask students to work in pairs to discus the three questions and find the answers.- Correct the students’ work and give remark.

While-speaking : (15 minutes)Task 2- Explain the requirements “The country of Fantasia started its overall reforms…”.- Divide the class into groups, asks each group to discus a section: Education Health careAgriculture- Guide the students how to speak by giving them useful suggestions:+ They have………… so ……..

- Work in pairs to discus the three questions and find the answers.A: What does each pair of picture tell you?B: It tells us the contrast between the present and past situations.A: What changes can you see in each pair of…?B: The new school and factory are much bigger and more beautiful than the old ones.A: What do you think …..to achieve these…?B: They must have taken some renovation measures.- Correct the answers oneself.

Group 1: EducationS1: The government of Fantasia has changed the curriculum and textbooks.S2: They also

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

140

Page 141: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng+ Due to the ………+ Thanks to the………..+ By applying……….- Walk round from group to group to give help if necessary.- Encourage students to speak out what they think even a phrase or a singular word.

Post-speaking : (10 minutes)Task 3- Ask students to work individually to summarize what they’ve discussed in their own words.- Move round to check the activities and to make sure

provided schools with more equipment and facilities.S3: They build more schools and raised the teachers’ salaries.S1: It is obvious that they……Group 2: Health careS1: Many hospitals have been built as well as the doctors’ and nurses’ salaries have been raised.S2: Due to the government’s policy, many more highly qualified doctors have worked to improve the people’s health.Group 3: AgricultureS1: Fantasia has applied appropriate policy to encourage farmers to work more efficiently, and they have built more dykes and damps, irrigation and drainage systems.S2: They’ve also applied new and advanced farming techniques, more facilities and

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

141

Page 142: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngthat students are working effectively.- Ask one or two students to report in front of the whole class.- Check and give remarks.

Homework: (3 minutes)Name some measures we’ve made to promote our economic system.

equipment.S3: They use fertilizers, pesticides and insecticides to protect their crops.

S1: The government of Fantasia has changed the curriculum and textbooks. They also provided schools with more equipment and facilities. They build more schools and raised the teachers’ salaries…S2: Fantasia has applied appropriate policy to encourage farmers to work more efficiently, and they have built more dykes and damps, irrigation and drainage systems. They’ve also applied new and advanced farming techniques, more facilities and equipment. They use fertilizers, pesticides and insecticides to protect their crops.

- Listen to the teacher.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

142

Page 143: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

- Write down the homework to do at home.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

143

Page 144: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngThe 39 th period Date : 25/ 10/ 2008Grade 12 Theme: economic reforms Unit 7 ListeningTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: -Students know the harm of taking drug.2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Listen for specific information. - Language: The present simple tense. - New words: Words related to to the topic. 3. Skills: - Listening and deciding on True or False statements. - Listening comprehensionII. Method: - Intergrated, mainly communicative.III. Teaching aids: - Tape, cassetteplayer, board, chalks, textbook.IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Notes

Warm-up: (5 minutes)- A story about an addictor.

Before you listen: (7 minutes)- Ask students to work in pairs to ask and answer the given questions.- Guide the students to answer if necessary.- Give further information.

- Explain the words that will appear in the listening text.

- Listen to the teacher.

- Work in pairs:S1: Should drug-taking be banned?S2: Yes, because it brings the users many harm on not only their physical but also mental health.S1: Drug-taking is

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

144

Page 145: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Ask students to read in chorus then individually.

While you listen: (20 minutes)Task 1:Ask students to read the statement at least once first.Ask them to guess the answersPlay the tape once then check how many answers can students find.Play the tape again.Check and give remarks.Call some students to say out their answers and the evidences they get to prove their answers.

Task 2:- Ask them to guess the answers.Play the tape once then check how many answers can students find.Play the tape again.Check and give remarks.- Call some students to say out their answers and the evidences they get to prove their answers

totally a social evil.- Listen and repeat:Tango discourageDrug-taker rationallyRuin solutionUnfortunately measures islanders

- Read the statement once to get the main contents.Listen to the tape and do the task.Find evidences to each of the answers.Represent if being asked.Keys: 1. F, 2.F, 3. T, 4. T, 5. F, 6. F, 7. T, 8. T, 9. F- Listen to the teacher’s explanation then correct the answers onself.

- Read the questions once to get the main contents.Listen to the tape and do the task.Find evidences to each of the answers.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

145

Page 146: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

After you listen: (10 minutes)- In group, ask students to discus the guided question, find the answer.- Move around to help if necessary.- Give remarks or even suggestions.

Represent if being asked.1. They discovered a plant containing a powerful drug.2. They grew it all over the island.3. The negative effects: people become lazy – children did not go to school – the shortage of food.4. Measures: introduced a law to make the drug illegal – put drug-takers into prison – export the drug to other countries.- Listen to the teacher’s explanation then correct the answers oneself.

- In groups, ask and answer the question.S1: Do you think that the Government of Tango……?S2: I don’t agree with that solution because when they export the drug to other countries the other peoples will suffer from the

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

146

Page 147: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngHomework: (3 minutes)- Imagine you are an MP of Tango what would you do to solve the problem.

drug-taking problems, and other government will face the same problems as theirs.- Listen to the teacher’s guide to correct oneself.

-Listen to the teacher and write down homework to do at home.

The 40 th period Date: 27/ 10/ 2008Grade 12 Theme: economic reforms Unit 7 WritingTime: 45 minutesI. Objectives:1. Educational aim: - Writing a report based on given information. Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

147

Page 148: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng 2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Writing a report on the economic development. - Language: +The tenses.

+ Connectors (time expressions) - New words: Words related to economic reforms.3. Skills: - Writing a report.II. Method: - Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: - A picture, board, chalks, textbook.

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Notes

Warm-up: (5 minutes)- Free talk about the changes in one’s home village during the renovation process.Pre-writing: (10 minutes)- Explain as clearly as possible the requirements “The table below presents the results the Government…..”.- Give clear task to students.

While-writing: (18 minutes)Task 1Ask students to look at Task 1.In pairs, ask students to ask and answer the questions.Move around to give help.Check and give remarks.

Do as required.Exchange the ideas with others.

Listen to the teacher.Get the task.

Work in pairs to do the task.S1: What was the economic situation in Tango before 1980?S2: It was really bad. The country was under-

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

148

Page 149: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Task 2- Explain the requirements: Writing a report.+ The economic situation of Tango before 1980.+ The measures taken by the Government and the people of Tango overcome the problems.+ The achievement ( as presented in the table) they have made as a result of the reform.- Ask students to work in groups to write report.- Walk round to give help if necessary.

developed.S1: What can you say about the economic situation in Tango from 1980 to 200?S2: Many positive changes has made. The economic situation in 2000 is much better than the one in 1980.S1: What do you think the ….?S: They have taken positive measures….Listen to the teacher to correct oneself.

Work in groups to do the task.The Government and the people of Tango started their overall economic reform in the mid 1970s. Before that time the economy of the country was in ruins………. . The Government of Tango has taken a lot of measures in order to promote the national economy such as……. . Despite all difficulties, the

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

149

Page 150: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Post-writing: (10 minutes)- Ask some groups to represent their work, ask other to give remark.- Choose some good writing to read in class and give remark.

Homework: (2 minutes)- Ask students to rewrite the task at home and preapare part Language Focus at home.

people of Tango ….. . After all, they have received greater and greater achievements…. Compare the result to the other groups.Listen to the teacher’s explanations.Exchange the writing to other groups to check and give remarks.

- Represent the task on board if being asked.Read the writing to get others’ remarks.The Government and the people of Tango started their overall economic reform in the mid 1970s. Before that time the economy of the country was in ruins………. . The Government of Tango has taken a lot of measures in order to promote the national economy such as……. . Despite all difficulties, the people of Tango ….. . After all, they have

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

150

Page 151: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

received greater and greater achievements….

Do as the teacher asked.

- Listen to the teacher and write down homework.

The 41 st period Date: 30/ 10/ 2008Grade 12 Theme: economic reforms Unit 7 Language FocusTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: - Strong form and weak form of auxiliaries. Adverbial clauses. 2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Combining the sentences. - Language: Know how to use although, even though… - New words: Words related to the exercises3. Skills: - Writing sentences with adverbial clauses of concession.II. Method: - Intergrated, mainly communicative. Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

151

Page 152: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngIII. Teaching aids: - Board, cassetteplayer, chalks, textbook and notebook.IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Notes

1. warm up: (5 minutes)- Introduce the lesson to the students.2. Pronunciation: ( 15 minutes)- Explain the way to use strong form (emphasis, positive, stressed cases ), weak form (interrogative, unstressed cases)- Help students to know the pronunciation.- Practice:A: Can you speak English?B: Yes, I can.A: Must we go now?B: I think we must.A: Have you met Quang?B: Yes, I haveA: Has she gone?B: Yes, she has.A: Shall we go now?B: I think we ought to.A: Will you come tomorrow?B: Yes, I will.A: Do you really have time for it?B: Yes, I do.3. Grammar and vocabulary: ( 23 minutes)- Explain once again the “Clause of concession”.ThoughAlthough S + V, S + V

- Listen to the teacher.

Get the teacher’s explanation.Can /kæn/ (str) /kən/ (w)Could /kud/Must /mst/ (str) /məst/ (w)Have /hæv/Has /hæs/Do /du/Does /dz/Is /iz/Am / æ m/Will /wil/Shall /∫æl/Practice reading in chorus or individually.

Exercise1:Although it rained a lot, we enjoyed our vacation.Although we had planned everything

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

152

Page 153: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngEven thoughGuide the students how to do the exercises.Divide the class into groups, ask them to do the exercises.- Walk round to give help if necessary. Correct the students’ work if necessary.

4. Homework: (2 minutes)

carefully, a lot of things went wrong.Even though/ Although the doctor has advised him to quit, Bob (still)….Although it was cold and rainy, we managed to go to class in time.Although Luong has studied English only for six months, he can …….I didn’t go to bed early although I was …Exercise 2:Although I was very tiredAlthough I had never seen her beforealthough it was pretty coldalthough we don’t like them very muchAlthough I didn’t speak the languageAlthough the heat was onalthough I’d met her twice beforealthough we have known ……..Exercise 2:we forget many thingsthey were very happy

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

153

Page 154: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng - Ask students to revise the strong form and weak form of auxiliaries, the use of clause of concession, redo all the exercises and prepare to correct the second test at home.

he could speak/ read the language…Although he had revised everything…it is pretty cold/ there hasn’t been….

- Listen to the teacher and write down homework to do at home

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

154

Page 155: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngThe 42 nd period Date : 02/ 11/ 2008Grade 12 Theme: Correct the test

I. Objectives: After this correction students will be clearer about the test they have just done. And have to know how to try their best for the next test.II. Method: Integrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: board, the test paper, key for the testIV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Greeting- Ask students some questions on the previous test- Tell the aim of the period: correct the testI. Circle the best opitions to complete the following passage : (6 minutes) - Repeat the question- Get students to read the passage again carefully- Call some students to read out their answers, and the others give remarks if it is correct or not.- Finally read the keys out aloudII. Choose the sentence that has the same meaning with the given sentence : (10 minutes) - Repeat the question- Get student to read the test again carefully- Call some students to read

- Greeting- Listen and understand the task- Get ready for the lesson

- Look at their paper- Compare the resutls with the others- Get the correct answers from the keys

- Look at their paper- Compare the

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

155

Page 156: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngout their answers, and the others give remarks if it is correct or not- Finally read the keys out aloudIII. Choose the word that pronounced differently from the others: (8 minutes)- Repeat the question- Get students to read the writing again carefully- Call some students to write their answers on the board, and the others give remarks if it is correct or not- Finally read the keys out aloudKeys:IV. Choose the best answer: (10 minutes)- Repeat the question- Show the listening script on the board or read the passage again several times- Get students toread the passage again carefully- Call some students to write their answers on the board, and the others give remarks if it is correct or not- Finally read the keys out aloud

Homework: (4 minutes)Prepare UNIT 8: life in the future

results with the others- Get the correct answers from the keys

- Look at the writing again and compare it with the others- Correct the wrong sentences base on the key

- Look at the writing again and compare it with the others- Correct the wrong sentences base on the key

- Prepare UNIT 8: life in the future

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

156

Page 157: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

UNIT 8: life in the future

The 43 rd period Date : 10/ 11/ 2008Grade 12

Theme: life in the futureUnit 8ReadingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: - Students read and guess the meaning of words in contexts.

- They read and decide on True or False statements. - They note taking and comprehend the passage.

2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: The changes of the life in the future. - Language: Common knowledge of the life and the environment…. - New words: Words related to the life and the economic, environment…3. Skills: - Guessing meaning in context, deciding on true or false and passage comprehension.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

157

Page 158: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngII. Method: - Integrated, mainly communicative.III. Teaching aids: -Picture, board, chalks, textbook, handouts,…IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)Aims: to introduce the topic of the lesson and to raise students' interest.- Introduce the new lesson to the students.

Before you read : (7 minutes)- Ask students to look at the picture ask and answer the questions.

While you read : (23 minutes)- Ask students to look through the passage and read in silence- Help students read the passage- Explain pronunciation and meaning of new words which appear in the passageTask 1 : (3 minutes)- Ask students to read through the text once to find out some new words, guess the main idea.- Explain new words (give the Vietnamese equivalents), guide the sts to get the main contents of the reading text.

- Listen to teacher.

- Look at the picture, listen to the teacher then ask and answer the questions in the book. - Work in pairs.

- Listen to the teacher then read the passages - Ask some new words if necessary

- Work individually to read the text then choose the the words and phrases in the passage:- Share the key with other students:Keys1. Pessimists2. optimists3. economic depression4. terroism

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

158

Page 159: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Ask students to work individually in 3 minutes to do this task.- Guide students to read through the passage , then focus on only the sentences surrounding the suggested words to do the task effectively.- Give students some more words that may be new/ unfamiliar to them.- Guide the students to read the word in chorus and individually.

Task 2: (4 minutes)- Ask students to read the passage again then work in pairs to ask and answer the suggested questions.- Walk round the class to give help if necessary.

- Give suggested words, phrases or useful suggestions.

- Correct the students’ work.

Task 3: (6 minutes)

5. wiped out6. Space shuttle

- Listen to the teacher then do the task.- Works in pais: Keys: 1 - Many large corporations will be wiped out and millions of jobs will be lost.2 - The security of the earth will be threatened by terrosist groups will become more powerful and more dangerous.3 - People will be living in much cleaner environment, breathing fresher air anf being looked after by …….4 - They are developments in micro technology–coputer and telecommunication.

- Work individually to read the text then choose the the words and phrases in the

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

159

Page 160: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Ask students to read the questions carefully.- Ask students to read through the passage again.- Ask the class to do .- Call some students to give the answers.- Ask others students to correct.- Give the true answers

After you read : (8 minutes)- Ask students to work in group to scan the text again.- Ask them to work in small groups of three or four to discuss the Advantages and disadvantages of Robots- Encourage them to use their own words.- Ask some students to report. Home work: (2 minutes) - Review the reading and prepare the speaking at home.

passage:- Share the key with other students:Keys:- Work: Factories, offices….- Travel: Cars, space-shuttle, petrol, ….

- Listen to the teacher then do the task.- Some students stand up to report their discussions.- Work in groups

- Listen to the teacher- Write down the homework to do at home.

The 44 th Period Date: 15/ 11/ 2008Grade 12 Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

160

Page 161: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng Theme: life in the future Unit 8 SpeakingTime: 45 minutes I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: - Talking about the life in the future. - Discussing predictions about life in the future….2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: The life in the future. - Language: + The way to make the life better in the future. + The tenses.

- New words: words related to the life in the future.3. Skills: - Discussing predictions about life in the future. - Talking about changes the life in the future.II. Method: - Integrated, mainly communicative.III. Teaching aids: - Board, chalks, textbook, handouts.IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Notes

Warm-up: (5 minutes)Tell a short story to prove that the renovation measures has apparently changed the social and people’s lives positively.

Pre-speaking : (12 minutes)Task 1- Guide students how to practise.- Ask students to work individual.- Walk around and help them.- Call students to say.- Correct their mistakes.

Listen and give one’s own ideas or story if being asked.

- Pair work. - Practice answering the toppic:By the end of the 21st, chinese astronaunts ……

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

161

Page 162: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

While-speaking : (15 minutes)Task 2- Guide students how to practise.- Ask students to work in pairs.- Help the students with new structures.- Walk around and help them.- Call some student to stand up and report before the class.- Correct their mistakes.

Post-speaking : (10 minutes)Task 3- Guide students how to practise.- Ask students to work in gruops - Call some pairs of student to stand up and practise.- Correct their mistakes.

Homework: (3 minutes)- Ask the students to prepare the listening at home.

………By the end of the 21st, a new moon city will have been opened….……………

- Listen to the teacher then practise.- Workin pairs.Ex: I think it is likely that by the end of the 21st century …………In my opion, it is unlikely that by the end of the 21st

century ………………………………

- Free practices- The students who are called stand up to talk to the class about their ideas.

- Listen to the teacher.- Write down the homework to do at home.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

162

Page 163: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 45 th period Date : 22/ 11/ 2008Grade 12 Theme: life in the future Unit 8 ListeningTime: 45 minutesI. Objectives:1. Educational aim: - Listening, mastering the content of the tape.

- Doing the tasks fluently (true or false statements and the details). 2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: By the end of the lesson ,students will

be able to understand how to make the life better and longer in the future.

- Language: The present simple tense and the simple future tense. - New words: Words related to to the topic. 3. Skills: - Listening and deciding on True or False statements. - Listening for details.II. Method: - Intergrated, mainly communicative.III. Teaching aids: - Tape, cassetteplayer, board, chalks, textbook.IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Notes

Warm-up: (5 minutes)- A story about age. - Listen to the Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

163

Page 164: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Before-listening: (7 minutes)Before you listen:- Ask students to look at the book and answer the question in the book.- Let them work in pairs.- Listen and correct for them.

Listen and repeat- Turn on the tape and ask students to listen- Let students listen again and repeat.- Write some words on board and ask students to read them aloud.- Correct.While-listening: (20 minutes)Task 1:Ask students to read the statement at least once first.Ask them to guess the answersPlay the tape once then check how many answers can students find.Play the tape again.Check and give remarks.Call some students to say out their answers and the evidences they get to prove their answers.

Task 2:- Ask them to guess the answers.Play the tape once then check

teacher.

Before you listen:- Look at the book.- Listen to the teacher.- Ask and answer the question in the book.- Work in pairs.

- Listen and repeat.- Preactise in pairs- Read the new words aloud in chorus then in devidual.

- Read the statement once to get the main contents.Listen to the tape and do the task.Find evidences to each of the answers.Represent if being asked.Keys: 1. F, 2.F, 3. F, 4. T, 5. T. - Listen to the teacher’s explanation then correct the answers onself.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

164

Page 165: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïnghow many answers can students find.Play the tape again.Check and give remarks.- Call some students to say out their answers and the evidences they get to prove their answers.- Let students work inpairs.

After-listening: (10 minutes)- In group, ask students to discus the guided question, find the answer.- Move around to help if necessary.- Give remarks or even suggestions.

- Read the questions once to get the main contents.Listen to the tape and do the task.Find evidences to each of the answers.Represent if being asked.1. Eating more healthily food, cutting down on things like butter, alcohol and cigarettes.2. The development in medical science. Because nobody dies from old age, just from diseases that affect people when they get older.3. In ten years’stime AIDS will also be brought under control.- Listen to the teacher’s explanation then correct the answers oneself.

- In groups, discuss the advantages disadvantages of having a very long life.Example:

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

165

Page 166: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Homework: (3 minutes)- Ask students write things to do to have a healthy and long life, and prepare part writing at home.

Advantages: - Do many things they want to do/ enjoy life more.- See their children and grandchildren grow up.- Help their children and grandchildren.- Children and grandchildren are happy with them.Disadvantages: - Too weak to do things and often ill.- Feel lonely when children have grown up and busy with their lives, andfriends are dead.- Listen to the teacher’s guide to correct oneself.

-Listen to the teacher and write down homework to do at home.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

166

Page 167: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 46 th period Date: 24/ 11/ 2008Grade 12 Theme: life in the future Unit 8 WritingTime: 45 minutesI. Objectives:1. Educational aim: - Discribing the world you would like to live in in the future . 2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Writing about some one's ideas or imagines. - Language: +The tenses.

+ Connectors (time expressions) - New words: Words related to the life in the future, environment….3. Skills: _ To practise students’ speaking and writing skills.

_ To help students to able to write about the ideal world they would like to live in the year 2020.II. Method: - Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: - Board, chalks, textbook and notebook.

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Notes

Warm-up: (5 minutes)- Free talk about the life in the future.

Pre-writing: (10 minutes)Task 1- Ask student to read the request of task one and

Do as required.Exchange the ideas with others.

- Listen to teacher.- Write down- Do on board.- Report.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

167

Page 168: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngtranslate.- Explain them how to do the task- give students the structures:- guide them some new words.- Walk around and help them.- Call some to stand up and answer the questions- Corect.

While-writing: (18 minutes)Task 2- Ask student to read the request of task two.- Explain them how to do the task- guide them to write.- Walk around and help them.- Call one to do on board.- Corect.

Post-writing: (10 minutes)- Ask some groups to represent their work, ask other to give remark.- Choose some good writing to read in class and give remark.

Ex:+ conflict (n)+ harmony (n)+ materialistic (a).Answer:+ World: Peaceful, no war, no conflicts, no threat of terrorism, people live is harmony.+ Employment: everyone has a job.+ Environment: clean and healthy, less noise, less popolation, having larger parks, wild life is protected.+ People: Less materialistic, less silfish, less violent and more loving

- Listen to the teacher.- discuss and write down.- work in groups.- Compare the result to the other groups.

- Listen to the teacher’s explanations.- Exchange the

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

168

Page 169: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Homework: (2 minutes)- Ask students to rewrite the task at home and preapare part Language Focus at home.

writing to other groups to check and give remarks.- Represent the task on board if being asked.Read the writing to get others’ remarks.- Do as the teacher asked.

- Listen to the teacher and write down homework.

The 47 th period Date: 28/ 11/ 2008Grade 12 Theme: life in the future Unit 8 Language FocusTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: - Contracted form of auxiliaries (cotinued). - Prepositions and articles.2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Combining the sentences. - Language: Know how to use in, on, at, of, by, about, among, to, with…. - New words: Words related to the exercises3. Skills:

_ To practise students’ pronunciation and writing skills._ To help students to be able pronounce the full forms and

the contracted forms of auxiliaries and introduce to them the use of some prepositions and articles. Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

169

Page 170: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngII. Method: - Intergrated, mainly communicative.III. Teaching aids: - Board, tape, cassetteplayer, chalks, textbook and notebook.IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Notes

1. Warm up: ( 5 minutes)- Introduce the lesson to the students.

2. Pronunciation: ( 15 minutes)_ play the tape and asks students to listen to the sounds listed in their books._ asks students to listen to the tape then repeat the words in chorus._ asks students to repeat the words individually._ correct their pronunciation if necessary._ asks students to read the sentences suggested individually._ can read the sentences first and notice the sounds in words._ asks some students to read the sentences aloud._ asks others to give comments then correct their pronunciation if necessary.

3. Grammar: ( 23 minutes)Exercise1:_ explains how to change

- Listen to the teacher.

Get the teacher’s explanation._ listen to the sounds listed in their books._ listen to the tape then repeat the words in chorus._ some individuals repeat the words.

_ listen to the teacher’s correction._ read the sentences suggested individually.

_ listen to the teacher’s

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

170

Page 171: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngdirect speech into reported speech with gerund briefly then give some examples to illustrate and asks students to work in pairs to do the exercise suggested._ asks students to discuss the answers with their friends._ asks some of the students to do the exercise orally._ asks others to give comments. _ gives the suggested answers if necessary.

Exercise 2:_ explains the example carefully._ asks students to work in pairs to do the exercise suggested._ asks students to discuss the answers with their friends._ asks some of the students to do the exercise orally._ asks others to give comments. _ gives the suggested answers if necessary.

explanation._ work in pairs. Do the exercise given in the textbooks._ discuss the answers with their friends then correct the mistakes themselves._ discuss the answers with their friends._ some of the students to do the exercise orally._ other students give comments._ take notes of the suggested answers.Keys:1. in, 2.of, 3.on, 4.at, 5.to, 6.in, 7.about, 8.for, 9. between, 10.to.

_ notice the teacher’s explanation.

_ work in pairs. Do the exercise given in the textbooks._ discuss the answers with their friends then correct the mistakes themselves._ some of the students to do the exercise orally.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

171

Page 172: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

4. Homework: (2 minutes) - Ask students to revise the strong form and weak form of auxiliaries, the use of prepositions and articles, redo all the exercises and prepare Test yourself C at home.

_ other students give comments._ take notes of the suggested answers.Keys:1.Ø, 2.Ø, Ø, Ø, 3. Ø. The. the, 4.the. Ø, 5. the. Ø, 6.the. Ø, 7.the. Ø, 8.an.the.the, 9 Ø.the, 10. Ø,a.

- Listen to the teacher and write down homework to do at home

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

172

Page 173: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngThe 48 th period Date : 30/ 11/ 2008Grade 12 Test yourself c

I. Objectives: After this lesson, students will be able to:- Check themselves their skills in reading, speaking,

listening, writing.- Improve their knowledge through the test yourself.

II. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative.II. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, cassetteplayer, board, hand-outs…IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Greeting- Ask students something about the test yourself C* Have you prepared it at home?* Have you got any difficulties?

Test yourself

I. Listening(2.5 points) (10 minutes)- Present the task: Listen and complete the table below- Tell students the topic of the table- Get students to look through the table- Explain the meaning of new words- After that turn on the tape of the passage aloud twice- Let students fill in the blanks with the words they have just

- Greeting- Answer teacher’s questions

- Look at the book and listen to the task- understand the task- Listen to the tape carefully- Fill in the blanks with the words they’ve just heard- Correct mistakes

Keys:1.B, 2. C, 3. A, 4. B, 5. C.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

173

Page 174: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngheard- Go round the class to control the work- Then turn on the tape of the passage the last time for students to check their results- Correct mistakesII. Reading (2.5 points) (10 minutes)- Present the task: Read the passgae and choose the statements are True or False.- Get students to work in groups, discuss about the passage- Go round the class to control the discussion- State the best option- Correct mistakes

III. Grammar(2.5 points) (8 minutes)- Recall the grammar of articals.- Giude students how to do- Give them some newwords:- Do the first as an example.- Ask students to to the exercise.- Call the to to on board.- Go round the class to control the set’s activities- State the keys- Correct mistakes

- Look at the textbook and listen to the teacher then read the passage and choose the statements are True or False.- Work in groups to discuss about the passage- Finish the task- Compare their results with the other groups, and correct.Keys:1. F, 2. F, 3. T, 4. T, 5. F.

- Listen to the teacher- Work in groups to complete the sentences- Compare the results with the other groups- Correct mistakesKeys:A.1. The, 2. An, 3. Ø 4. The, 5. A, 6. Ø.

B1. Athough Nam worked very hard, he didn't pass the exam.2. Although I was very

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

174

Page 175: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

IV. Writing(2.5 points) (7 minutes)- Giude students how to write- Give students some models and structures to writes..- Ask students to write.- Call the to to on board.- Go round the class to control the students’ activities- Correct mistakes

Homework (5 minutes)- Ask students: + to study all the lessons again

tired, I couldn't sleep.3. Eventhough she had all the ……..4. Athough the traffic was bad, we arrived on time.

- Listen to the teacher carefully.- Work in groups or in pairs then write.- Compare the results with the other groups.

- Correct mistakes

- Study all the lessons again

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

175

Page 176: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 49 th period Date : 02/ 12/ 2008Grade 12

Review for the first term- GRADE 12 Lesson 1– TENSE revision

A. Objectives;1- Knowledge: By the end of the lesson students will be able to; - use the correct verbs in simple present, simple past, present continuous, past continuous 3- Skills: - Remembering the use of each tense in context.4- Education: - study the differences in use of the verb-tense in English language.B.Teaching aids;1.Teacher: - Method: mainly communicative approach. - Materials: helping board, textbook, handouts.2. Student:- Materials: Student’s book Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

176

Page 177: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng3. Anticipated problems: SS may find the use of present simple is misty.C.Procedure;Theme Teacher's activities Student's

activitiesI.

Organize( 1 m')

1- Check the student's list2- Arrange the seats if it's necessary

- Monitor gives names of absent students

II.Presentat

ion(35 m')

A- the present simple tense.- T gives some examples on helping board or handouts.- Put the verbs into correct formA1: I always (go)… to bed at 10 p.m .A2:She (visit)… her daugster every Sunday.B1: This book (be)… very interesting.B2:Ann and Linda (play)... tennis very well.C1: Water (freeze)… at zero degree Centigrade.C2: The Sun (not move)... around the Earth.D1: I (think)… they should work harder for the exam.D2:Jane (like)… living in the country?

- Gives questions:1. What are the affirmative form and negative form?2. What are the uses of present simple?- Call some pairs to answer.- T feedback and correct.

B- the past simple tense.- T gives some examples on helping board, ask Ss to give the correct form of the verbs.

- work in pair, study the examples and asnwer the Teacher's questions;* Expected answer;I. form.Affir: S + V-s,es V- infinitiveNegat: S + does Do not + V-infinitive.II. use.1- habit or daily routine.2- for present situation, state or ability.3- for true fact or universal truth.4- for view, feeling or hobby.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

177

Page 178: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

A1: I (go)… to bed at 10 p.m yesterday.A2:She (visit)… HaNoi two years ago.B1: They often (buy)… picture stories when they were at sencodary school.B2:Ann often (go)… out for lunch after work.C1: He (come)… home, (turn)… the light, and (open).. the windows.C2: I (run)… out of my office, (wave).. a taxi, and (go) to Hellen's house.

- Gives questions:1. What are the affirmative form and negative form?2. What are the uses of present simple?- Call some pairs to answer.- T feedback and correct.

C- the present continuous and past continuous tense.

- T gives some examples on helping board, ask Ss to study the ex and answer the questions.Present continuous(1)

Past continuous(2)

A1: Look at that man! He is wearing a traditional suit.A2: Where are your children?- They are playing in the front garden.

A1: I was reading book at 4 p.m yesterday.A2:They were visiting Ho Chi Minh museum yesterdy morning.

* Expected answer;I. form.Affir: S + V-edNegat: S + did not + V-infinitive

II. use.1- for completed action at definite time.2- for past habit 3- for a series of actions happened in the past.

* Expected answer;I. form.(1) S + is,are,am + V-ing(2) S + was,were + V-ing

II. use.(1)1- for a progressive action at the time of speaking.2- for a progressive action happening at present period of time3- for a gradual

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

178

Page 179: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

B1: We are working hard this week for the coming exams.B2: He is looking for a job as a journalist.C1: Harry up. It is getting dark.C2: The price of petrol is rising rapidly.D1: We are having a party this Sunday evening.D2: She is leaving London for New york this week.

B1: I was watching TV while my wife was cooking.B2: while she was studying, her roomate was listening to music.C1: He was playing football all last summer.C2: They were dancing all the yesterday evening.D1: It rained when we were camping.D2: When I came, she was crying.

- Gives questions:1. What are the affirmative form and negative form of each tense?2. What are the uses of present continuous?- Call some pairs to answer.- T feedback and correct.

happening action.4- for a near future plan.(2)1- for a progressive action at a definite time in the past.2- for 2 or more progressive simultaneous actions happening at definite time in the past.3- to emphasize the sequence of action at a period of time.4- for a progressive action interrupted by another simple past action.

IV.Summary

(2 m')

- T summarize the content of the lesson.+ use and form of the verb

- listen and understand

V.Homewor

k(2 m')

- Asign homeworks: do exercise 2,3,4 page 7 ( English 12, workbook); exercise 1,2 page

- Listen to the teacher- Write down the

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

179

Page 180: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

18(English 12- student book) - Prepare for tense revision: Revise the present perfect, present perfect continuous, past perfect continuous.

homework to do at home.

The 50 th period Date : 04/ 12/ 2008Grade 12

Review for the first term- GRADE 12 Lesson 2 – TENSE revision

A. Objectives;1- Knowledge: By the end of the lesson students will be able to; - use the correct verbs of present perfect, present perfect continuous, past perfect continuous 3- Skills: - Remembering the use of each tense in context.4- Education: - study the differences in use of the verb-tense in English language.B.Teaching aids;1.Teacher: - Method: mainly communicative approach. - Materials: helping board, textbook, handouts.2. Student:- Materials: Student’s book3. Anticipated problems: SS may find difficult to distinguish the use of present perfect, present perfect continuous .C.Procedure;Theme Teacher's activities Student's

activitiesI.

Organize( 1 m')

1- Check the student's list2- Arrange the seats if it's necessary

- Monitor gives names of absent

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

180

Page 181: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

studentsII.

Presentation

(35 m')

A- the present perfect tense.- T gives some examples on helping board or handouts.- Put the verbs into correct formPresent perfect(1) Present perfect

cont(1)A1: I have done my homeworks.( finished)

A2: He has studied Frech for a year.

B1: We haven't met her for age.B2: He has worked as a journalist since 1999.

A1: I have been doing my homeworks. (continue)A2:She has been studying Frech for a year.( emphasize on constant of action)B1: I am tired. I have been working too hard.B2: He has been running. He looks exhausted.

- Gives questions:1. What are the affirmative form and negative form of each tense?2. What are the uses of present continuous?- Call some pairs to answer.- T feedback and correct.

B- the past perfect continuous tense.

- T gives some examples on helping board, ask Ss to give the correct form of the verbs.A1: I (phone)… him before he

- work in pair, study the examples and asnwer the Teacher's questions;

* Expected answer;I. form.(1) S + have/has + PII

(2) S + have/has + been + V-ing

II. use.(1)1- for an action happened in the past and has finished but don't mention its comlete point of time.2- for an action started in the past and extended into present used with Since; For + time (2)1- for an action that started in the past and continue to present.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

181

Page 182: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

came. yesterday.A2:When she arrived at the station, Her parents ( leave)…A3: He sold his house after he ( redecorate) ….it.

B- Practice- T give handout and ssk Ss to do exercise 2 English 12 – workbook.1. Sam….(not receive) the parcel the last time I….. (speak) to him.2. I …(consider) buying a house but now I…( change) my mind.3. When you…(feel) hungry later, room service…(bring) you whatever you… (want).4. I…. (find) it difficult to convince the ticket inspector that I … (lose) my ticket.5. Since I … (pay) for our lunch, I …( try) to attract the waiter's attention.6. As soon as I …(have) a good look at the designs, I… (send) them back to you.7. I… (hope) to meet you ever since I … (read) your first novel.8. Whatever…(happen) , I… (meet) you here in a week's time.9. By the time you …(finish) getting ready, we …(miss) the train!10. Sally! I …(not expect) to see you here! What… (you do) in New York?- Call some Ss to pesent answer orally.- Feedback and give correction.

2- for an action that has just finished often relates to present result.

* Expected answer;I. form. S + had + PII

II. use.(1)1- for an action happened before another simple past action.

- Do the task in 6 minutes- exchange their answers.- Present the answers orally.

* Answer:1. haven't received; spoke2. was considering/have been considering; have changed3. feel; will bring;want4. found; had lost5. was paying; tried6. have had;

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

182

Page 183: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

will send7. have been hoping; read8. happens; will meet9. finish/have finished; will have missed10. didn't expect/was not expecting; are doing

IV.Summary

(2 m')

- T summarize the content of the lesson.+ use and form of the verb

- listen and understand

V.Homewor

k(2 m')

- Asign homeworks: exercise 1,2,3 page 28(English 12- student book) - Prepare for indirect speech; Revise the rules of transforming directed into indirected.

- Listen to the teacher- Write down the homework to do at home.

The 51 st period

Date : 06/ 12/ 2008Grade 12

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

183

Page 184: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Review for the first term- GRADE 12 Lesson 3 – Indirect speech

A. Objectives;1- Knowledge: By the end of the lesson students will be able to; - speak and write sentences in the reported speech.3- Skills: - Remembering the use of each kind of reported speech in context.4- Education: - study use of reported speech in English language.B.Teaching aids;1.Teacher: - Method: mainly communicative approach. - Materials: helping board, textbook, handouts.2. Student:- Materials: Student’s book3. Anticipated problems: SS may find difficult to the equivalent forms of Pronouns, adverbs in reported speech .C.Procedure;Theme Teacher's activities Student's

activitiesI.

Organize( 1 m')

1- Check the student's list2- Arrange the seats if it's necessary

- Monitor gives names of absent students

II.Warm-up

(5 m')

III.

*Rewrite these sentences in reported speech

- Ask Ss to do in 2 minutes1. " I love my parents very much" Jane said.Jane said……………………………………2. " I am going to work in Ha Noi next month". Peter said.Peter said he………………………………. - Ask Ss to pay attention to the examples and give remarks the indirect speech . 1. Tense?2. Pronouns? ( personal,

- Rewrite these sentences.- Present on the board.- discuss and correct* Expected answers:1. Jane said she loved her parents very much.2. Peter said he was going to work in HaNoi the month after.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

184

Page 185: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngPresentat

ion(35 m')

possessive, demonstrative)3. Adverbs? ( place, time)A. Grammar :Reported speech - T give examples and ask Ss to give remarks.I) We change the tenses of the verb if reported verb is simple past.1, Reported speech: statementEx1: He said, "I have just bought a laptop today."-> He said (that) he had bought a laptop that day.Ex2: They said, " We are having a party for our victory tomrrow."-> They said they were having a party for their victory the following day.+ What are the changes needed?The needed changes are: Tense, pronouns, adverbs

2, Reported speech: questions Basic rule : S + asked + (O) + if /whether + S+ V....S + asked + (O)+ W/ H... + S + V.....

Ex1: “ Have you seen this film ?” Tom said. -> He asked me if / whether I had seen that film.Ex2: “ Where is the post office ? “ Jane said. -> She asked me where the post office was.

3, Command and requestS + told/asked/ordered/reminded/warned... + O + ( not ) + to + V....

- feedback and take notes

- rewrite and correct- Give remarks on the changes of reported speech- Listen to the teacher's explaining and note down.

- Listen and write down the rules.- rewrite and correct the sentences.- Give remarks on the changes of reported speech- Listen to the teacher's explaining and note down.

- Listen and Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

185

Page 186: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Ex1" “ Keep silent!” He said. -> He told us to keep silent.Ex2: “ Don’t come late!” Peter said. -> He asked us not to come late.Ex3: " don't touch that machine. It's dangerous." She said. -> She warned me not to touch that machine as it was dangerous.

-Give notes : Special cases:II) We don’t change the tenses of the verb in indirect speech in the following cases:1. An action happened at exact time .“ I was born in 1998 “ -> He said he was born in 1998.2. Conditional sentences ( types 2, 3 ).- “ If I were you, I wouldn’t do that.”-> He said if he were me, he would not do that.3. Past subjunctives ( wish- clause; as if...)-“ I wish I were a boy, “Mary said.-> Mary said she wished she were a boy.4, could , would , should, might, used to, ought to, would rather, had better,....- “ You had better not contact her,” he said to me.-> He said to me I had better not contact to her.5, general truths.- “ The sun rises in the east.” -> He said the sun rises in the east.

write down the rules.- rewrite and correct the sentences.- Give remarks on the changes of reported speech- Listen to the teacher's explaining and note down.

- Listen and write down the rules.- rewrite and correct the sentences.- Listen to the teacher's explaining and note down.

IV.Summary

(2 m')

- T summarize the content of the lesson.+ give remarks on the basic rules.

- listen and understand

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

186

Page 187: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

V.Homewor

k(2 m')

- Asign homeworks: exercise 1,2 page 38(English 12- student book) exercise 2,3,4 page 22 ( English 12, workbook) - Prepare for passive voice and conditional sientences: Revise the rules of transformation of active to passive.

- Listen to the teacher- Write down the homework to do at home.

The 52 nd period Date : 10/ 12/ 2008Grade 12

Review for the first term- GRADE 12 Lesson 4 – passive voice, Conditional sentence

A. Objectives;1- Knowledge: By the end of the lesson students will be able to;

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

187

Page 188: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng - use the correct passive sentence and conditional sentences.3- Skills: - Remembering the use of passive voice and conditional sentences.4- Education: - present wishes and passive speech in English language.B.Teaching aids;1.Teacher: - Method: mainly communicative approach. - Materials: helping board, textbook, handouts.2. Student:- Materials: Student’s book3. Anticipated problems: SS may find difficult to distinguish the use of conditional sentence type1 and type2 in some cases.C.Procedure;Theme Teacher's activities Student's

activitiesI.

Organize( 1 m')

1- Check the student's list2- Arrange the seats if it's necessary

- Monitor gives names of absent students

II.Warm-up

(5 m')

- Ask some questions:1. Do you know when was this school built at the first time?2. How many pupils have been taught since 1999?3. If you were the headmaster, what should be done to make our school better? - Call some Ss to answer orally, - Take note the answer on the board and feedback.- Instroduce the revision grammar point.

Work in pairs.

- write down the answers- give the answers orally.- other ss give remarks on the answers.

III.Presentat

ion(35 m')

A. Grammar :I) Passive voice.- T give examples and ask Ss to give remarks.Ex1: This bike is made of plastic.Ex2: Her book was read by thousand

- study the examples and give remarks on the form- buid the form

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

188

Page 189: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

of students last year.Ex3: These rooms have been painted several times.- Ask Ss to give remarks on the form.1- form.

To be + Past participle (PII)2- Rules of changing active to passive.2.1) Subject, object, verb.Ex1: VietNam exports rice.-> Rice is exported by VietNam.Active: Subject verb obiect

Passive:Subject be + PII by object

2.2) Tenses:Active tenses Passive tenses- simple present- simple past- present continuous- past continuous- present perfect- past perfect

- S + is/am/are + PII - S + was/were + PII

- S +is/am/are + being + PII

- S +was/were+ being + PII

- S + has/have + been + PII

- S + had + been + PII

2.3) Modal verbs:( can, could, may, must, should…)

S + modal verbs + be + PII

Ex1: Our village may be flooded in the rain season.

II) Conditional and wish sentence.1- Conditional sentence;1.1) Conditional sentence type

- study the model- give explaination to the rules.- write down

- study the active- give the equivalents to passive- write down

- study the model- give explaination to the form.- write down

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

189

Page 190: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

1.a- Form;Ex1: If he visits us, I will tell him the truth.

If clause Main clauseS + V(simple present

tense)

S + will + V(infinitive)

b- Use;b.1) express an real condition that is in present or may happen in the future.Ex1: If I have time, I'll visit you.Ex2: He will get good marks if he studies harder.b.2) Will" can be replaced by " can, may, must, should)Ex1: If you feel tired, you can stay at home.Ex2: We may finish our before noon if we start now.Ex3: If you want a good job, you must work hard now.1.2) Conditional sentence type 2.a- Form;Ex1: If he lived next to us, we would ask him for help.

If clause Main clauseS + V(simple past

tense)

S + would + V(infinitive)

b- Use;b.1) express an unreal condition that can't happen.Ex1: If I were a millionaire, I would buy a luxury car.Ex2: What would you do if you won 100.000$?1.3) Conditional sentence type 2.

- study the models- give explaination to the use.- write down

- study the model- give explaination to the form.- write down

- study the models- give explaination to the use.- write down

- study the model- give explaination to the form.- write down

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

190

Page 191: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

a- Form;Ex1: If he lived next to us, we would ask him for help.

If clause Main clauseS + V(past perfect

tense)

S + would have + V(infinitive)

b- Use;b.1) express an unreal condition in the past that coundn't happen.Ex1: If he had studied hard, he would have entered an university.Ex2: We wouldn't have missed the train if we had got up earlier.* Notice:If…not.. = Unless (trõ phi)Ex1: If he doesn't call her, she will be unhappy. -> Unless he call her, she will be unhappy.2- wish, if only + clause ( gi¸ mµ…)2.1) unreal wish at present.Ex1: I wish my life were better.Ex2: If only he loved me, I would be the happiest woman.2.2) unreal wish in the past.Ex1: We wish she hadn't failed the exam.Ex2: If only you had bought that house, we would have lived near the city center.

- study the models- give explaination to the use.- write down

- listen to the teacher, - take notes

IV.Summary

(2 m')

- T summarize the content of the lesson.+ give remarks on the basic rules.

- listen and understand

V.Homewor

k(2 m')

- Asign homeworks: exercise 1,2,3 page 50(English 12- student book) exercise 1,2,3 page 34 ( English 12,

- Listen to the teacher- Write down the

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

191

Page 192: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

workbook) - Prepare for passive voice and conditional sientences: Revise the rules of transformation of active to passive.

homework to do at home.

The 53 rd period Date : 15/ 12/ 2008Grade 12 Review for the first term- GRADE 12 Lesson 5 – Relative clauses, adverb clause of contrast

A. Objectives;1- Knowledge: By the end of the lesson students will be able to;

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

192

Page 193: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng - use relative clauses and adverb clause of contrast accurately.3- Skills: - Remembering the use of relative clauses and adverb clause of contrast.4- Education: - aware of the similarities of Vietnamese and English language through complex sentences.B.Teaching aids;1.Teacher: - Method: mainly communicative approach. - Materials: helping board, textbook, handouts.2. Student:- Materials: Student’s book3. Anticipated problems: SS may find difficult to distinguish the differences between defining and non-difining clauses in some cases.C.Procedure;Theme Teacher's activities Student's

activitiesI.

Organize( 1 m')

1- Check the student's list2- Arrange the seats if it's necessary

- Monitor gives names of absent students

II.Warm-up

(5 m')

Gap-filling- Ask Ss to do the task in pairs.1, I really like the book … is writen by To Hoai.2, The child… you saw at the party is Hellen's son.3, I have been to the village… my parents used to live.- Ask Ss to give the answer and explain the use of relative pronouns.- lead Ss to the new lesson.

- work in pairs- give the answers orally- explain the use of relative pronouns.

III.Presentat

ion(35 m')

A- Grammar.I. Relative clauses.1) Relative pronouns, relative averbs.- Ask Ss to fill in the blanks with suitable relative pronouns, relative

- work in groups of 4- give the answers orally- explain the use of relative

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

193

Page 194: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

adverbs.Relative pronouns

1. The boy… sits behind me can speak Spanish.2. The man… Jane loves is a film actor.3. People… houses were damaged in the flood will receice 100$ from Government.4. I like the the house… situated on the left bank of Huong river.

Relative adverbs1. I can't remember the place… I left my keys.2. Do you remember the day... the festival start?3. I don't know the reason … he refused my help.

- Call some groups to give explainations to the use of each relative of pronouns, relative of adverb.2. Defining clause and Non-defining clause- Ask Ss to discuss and explain the use of …Defining clause Non-defining

clause1. This is the lady who saw the accident.2. The car which Peter bought last week is made in USA.3. The town where we used to live is very quiet and

1. Shakespeare, who wrote Romeo and Juliet, died in 1616.2. David's house, which was built last year, is designed by a French

pronouns.

1. "Who, whom, whose, that" are used to modify man2. "Which, that" are used to modify things.3. "where" is used to modify adverb of places.4. "when" is used to modify adverb of time.

- Study the examples and discuss the use- explain orally in front of the class.- other groups give remarks.- listen to the teacher's feedback and notedown

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

194

Page 195: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

peaceful. architect.3. These horses, which are expensive, are mine.

- Call some groups to explain.- Feedback and give clear definition.3. Reduction of relative clauses.* to reduce relative clause, we omit " relative pronouns and the form of to be"Ex1: The boy who is talking to Marry is my boyfriend.-> The boy talking to Marry is my boy friend.Ex2: The books the are on the table are mine.-> The books on the table are mine.II. Adverb clause of contrast.1- A dverb clause of contrast. - Ask Ss to choose one of the words in the box to fill in the blank of each sentence.1. although, though, eventhough2. While, whereas3. yet

1. mÆc dï

2. trong khi3. tuy nhiªn

1. He didn't receive anything … he worked hard.2. …. She had to do housework, her sister didn't have to.3. Some children like apple … others hate it.4. He studied hard for the exam, … he failed again.- Feedback, explain the use of

- Study the examples and discuss the use- explain orally in front of the class.- other groups give remarks.- listen to the teacher's feedback and notedown

- Study the examples and discuss the use- listen to the teacher's feedback and notedown

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

195

Page 196: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

adverb clause of contrast.2- Noun- phrase of contrast.+ In spite of + Noun/Pronoun ( mÆc dï)+ Despite + Noun/Pronoun ( mÆc dï)- Gives some examplesEx1: In spite of bad weather, we managed to build the bridge.Ex2: Despite of working hard, he earned a little money.

IV.Summary

(2 m')

- T summarize the content of the lesson.+ give remarks on the basic use of relative clauses.

- listen and understand

V.Homewor

k(2 m')

- Asign homeworks: exercise 1,2 page 70- 1,2 page 82 (English 12- student book) exercise 4 page 41 - 2,3 page 47 ( English 12, workbook) - Prepare for the examination of the first term.

- Listen to the teacher- Write down the homework to do at home.

UNIT 9: deserts

The 55 th period Date: 02/ 01/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: desertsUnit 9ReadingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: - Guessing the meaning in the context. Deciding true or false statements

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

196

Page 197: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng - Passage comprehesions and Understanding the humour of the story.2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Lives of plants animals in deserts. - Language: Common knowledge of the life of plants and animals in the deserts - New words: Words related to the lives of plants and animals in deserts.3. Skills: - Guessing meaning in context, deciding on true or false and passage comprehension.II. Method: - Integrated, mainly communicative.III. Teaching aids: -Picture, board, chalks, textbook, handouts,…IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)Aims: to introduce the topic of the lesson and to raise students' interest.- Introduce the new lesson to the students.

Before you read : (7 minutes)- Ask students to look at the picture ask and answer the questions.

While you read : (23 minutes)- Ask students to look through the passage and read in silence- Help students read the passage- Explain pronunciation and

- Listen to teacher.

- Look at the picture, listen to the teacher then ask and answer the questions in the book. - Work in pairs.

- Listen to the teacher then read the passages - Ask some new words if necessary

- Work individually to Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

197

Page 198: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngmeaning of new words which appear in the passageTask 1 : (3 minutes)- Ask students to read through the text once to find out some new words, guess the main idea.- Explain new words (give the Vietnamese equivalents), guide the sts to get the main contents of the reading text.- Ask students to work individually in 3 minutes to do this task.- Guide students to read through the passage , then focus on only the sentences surrounding the suggested words to do the task effectively.- Give students some more words that may be new/ unfamiliar to them.- Guide the students to read the word in chorus and individually.

Task 2: (4 minutes)- Ask students to read the passage again then work in pairs to choose the statements are true or false.- Walk round the class to give help if necessary.- Give suggested words, phrases or useful suggestions.- Correct the students’ work.Task 3: (6 minutes)

read the text then choose the the words and phrases in the passage:- Share the key with other students:Keys:1. KÐo dµi, c¨ng ra2. Cã c¸t,3. Tr¾c lîng trªn kh«ng4. Héi ®Þa lý hoµng gia Austra5. Thæ d©n Australia6. Cån c¸t, ®ôn c¸t 7. ®é dèc, dèc thoai tho¶i8. Dèc ®øng, dèc ng-îc 9. Gß, ®èng10. §Ønh (gß/®èng)11. Cá l¸ nhá mäc trªn xa m¹c

- Listen to the teacher then do the task.- Works in pais: Keys: 1. F, 2. F, 3. T,4. F, 5. F, 6. T.

- Work individually to read the text then answer the questions:- Share the key with other students:Keys:1. They are Great

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

198

Page 199: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Ask students to read the questions carefully.- Ask students to read through the passage again.- Ask the class to do .- Call some students to give the answers.- Ask others students to correct.- Give the true answers

After you read : (8 minutes)- Ask student to read the story.Ask them for the humour of the story.Explain.Home work: (2 minutes) - Review the reading and prepare the speaking at home.

Victoria Deserts, Gibbon….2. It lies between Lake Eyre in the south, the….3. In 1845.4. He was the President of the South….5. They took camels across the desert.6. In thwe western part, they are short, mostly ….7. Two. They are hummock grasses and spinifex

- Read the story then answer.- Work in groups

- Listen to the teacher- Write down the homework to do at home.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

199

Page 200: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 56 th Period Date: 04/ 01/ 2008 Grade 12

Theme: deserts Unit 9

SpeakingTime: 45 minutes I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: - Explaining why some kind of trees and animals can exit in the deserts.2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: The lives of treas and animals in the deserts. - Language: + The way to make the life better in the deserts. + The tenses.

- New words: words related to the trees and animals in the deserts.3. Skills: - Talking about nature features of the deserts. - Explaining why some thing should be brought along while going across a desert.II. Method: - Integrated, mainly communicative.III. Teaching aids: - Board, chalks, textbook, handouts.IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Notes

Warm-up: (5 minutes)- Ask students about the deserts of Australia.

- Answer teacher's question.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

200

Page 201: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Pre-speaking : (12 minutes)Task 1- Guide students how to practise.- Ask students to work in pairs.- Explaining some new worrds.- Walk around and help them.- Call students to say.- Correct their mistakes.

While-speaking : (15 minutes)Task 2- Guide students how to practise.- Ask students to work in pairs.- Help the students with new structures.- Walk around and help them.- Call some student to stand up and report before the class.- Correct their mistakes.

Post-speaking : (10 minutes)Task 3- Guide students how to practise.- Ask students to work in groups- Call some pairs of student to stand up and practise.- Correct their mistakes.

Homework: (3 minutes)- Ask the students to prepare the listening at home.

- Pair work. - Practice answering the toppic:I think banana can’t exit in desirt because it is tropical plant but it is vey hot in desert …..………I think ….

- Listen to the teacher and do the task.Ex: A. I think the climate in desert is very rude. There is very little rain and it is always very hot….I think ……..……………………

- Free practices- The students who are called stand up to talk to the class about their ideas.

- Listen to the teacher.- Write down the homework to do at

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

201

Page 202: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

home.

The 57 th period Date : 06/ 01/ 2009Grade 12 Theme: deserts Unit 9 ListeningTime: 45 minutesI. Objectives:1. Educational aim: - Listening, mastering the content of the tape.

- Doing the tasks fluently (true or false statements and the details). 2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: By the end of the lesson ,students will

be able to understand how to make the lives in the deserts better.

- Language: The present simple tense. - New words: Words related to to the topic. Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

202

Page 203: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng3. Skills: - Listening and deciding on True or False statements. - Listening for details and gap-filling.II. Method: - Intergrated, mainly communicative.III. Teaching aids: - Tape, cassetteplayer, board, chalks, textbook.IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Notes

Warm-up: (3minutes)- Presentation

Before-listening: (7 minutes)Before you listen:- Ask students to look at the book and answer the question in the book.- Let them work in pairs.- Listen and correct for them.

Listen and repeat- Turn on the tape and ask students to listen- Let students listen again and repeat.- Write some words on board and ask students to read them aloud.- Correct.While-listening: (25 minutes)Task 1:Ask students to read the statement at least once first.Ask them to guess the answersPlay the tape once then check how many answers can students find.Play the tape again.Check and give remarks.

- Listen to the teacher.

Before you listen:- Look at the book.- Listen to the teacher.- Ask and answer the question in the book.- Work in pairs.

- Listen and repeat.- Preactise in pairs- Read the new words aloud in chorus then in devidual.

- Read the statement once to get the main contents.Listen to the tape and do the task.Find evidences to

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

203

Page 204: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngCall some students to say out their answers and the evidences they get to prove their answers.

Task 2:- Ask them to guess the answers.Play the tape once then check how many answers can students find.Play the tape again.Check and give remarks.- Call some students to say out their answers and the evidences they get to prove their answers.- Let students work inpairs.

Task 3:- Ask students to read the question quickly.- Guide students the how to do the task.

each of the answers.Represent if being asked.Keys: 1.T, 2.F, 3.T, 4.F, 5. T. - Listen to the teacher’s explanation then correct the answers onself.

- Read the questions once to get the main contents.Listen to the tape and do the task.Find evidences to each of the answers.Represent if being asked.Listen then answer.

Keys:1. It examines deserts, what are they and how they are formed2. It is hot, dry and sandy place, it is a beautiful land of silence and space. The sun shines, the wind blow and time and space seem endless.3. Natural and human.4. They contribute by eating every

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

204

Page 205: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- let student listen one or twice times.- Ask students to stand up and speak their answers.- Correct.

After-listening: (7 minutes)- Ask students to discus the guided question, find the answer then write about deserts.- Let them work in groups- Move around to help if necessary.- Give remarks or even suggestions.Homework: (3 minutes)- Ask students write things to do to have a healthy and long life, and prepare part writing at home.

plant they can find, this makes the land become deserts.

- Read the questions once to get the main contents.Listen to the tape and do the task.Find evidences to each of the answers.Represent if being asked.Listen then answer.

Keys:1.90%, 2. smaller plants. 3. Prevent, 4.Spreading5.Capital, 6.canals

- Listen to the teacher’s explanation then correct the answers oneself.

- In groups, discuss the guided questions and write about the deserts to correct oneself.

-Listen to the teacher and write down homework to

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

205

Page 206: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

do at home.

The 58 th period Date: 08/ 01/ 2009Grade 12 Theme: deserts Unit 9 WritingTime: 45 minutesI. Objectives:1. Educational aim: - Describing main features of a deserts. 2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Writing about the Sahara deserts. - Language: +The tenses.

+ Connectors (time expressions) - New words: Words related to the Sahara desert.3. Skills: _ To practise students’ speaking and writing skills.

_ To help students to able to write about the Sahara desertsII. Method: - Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: - Board, chalks, textbook and notebook.

IV. Procedure: Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

206

Page 207: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Notes

Warm-up: (3 minutes)- Presentation

Pre-writing: (10 minutes)- Ask student to read the request of task one and translate.- Explain them how to do the task- give students the structures:- guide them some new words.- Walk around and help them.- Corect.

While-writing: (20 minutes)- Ask student to read the request of the writing.- Explain them how to do the task- guide them to write.- Walk around and help them.- Call one to do on board.- Corect.

Post-writing: (10 minutes)- Ask some groups to represent their work, ask other to give remark.- Choose some good writing to read in class and give remark.

- Listen to the teacher.

- Listen to the teacher.- Try to understand the new words and phrases in the table.- Work in groups.- Ask the teacher about the words or phrases if can't understand.

- Listen to the teacher.- discuss and write down.- work in groups.- Compare the result to the other groups.Ex:The Sahara is the largest desert in the world. It is located in the Northern Africa. The desert extends from…….

- Listen to the teacher’s explanations.- Exchange the writing to other groups to check and

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

207

Page 208: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Homework: (2 minutes)- Ask students to rewrite the task at home and preapare part Language Focus at home.

give remarks.- Represent the task on board if being asked.Read the writing to get others’ remarks.- Do as the teacher asked.

- Listen to the teacher and write down homework.

The 59 th period Date: 10/ 01/2009Grade 12 Theme: deserts Unit 9 Language FocusTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives: Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

208

Page 209: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng1. Educational aim: - Full and contracted forms of auxiliaries. - So, but, however and therefore.2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Combining the sentences. - Language: Know how to use so, but, however and therefore. - New words: Words related to the exercises.3. Skills:

_ To practise students’ pronunciation and writing skills._ To help students to be able pronounce the full forms and

the contracted forms of auxiliaries and introduce to them the use of so, but, however and therefore.II. Method: - Intergrated, mainly communicative.III. Teaching aids: - Board, tape, cassetteplayer, chalks, textbook and notebook.IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Notes

1. Warm up: ( 3 minutes)- Introduce the lesson to the students.

2. Pronunciation: ( 15 minutes)_ play the tape and asks students to listen to the sounds listed in their books._ asks students to listen to the tape then repeat the words in chorus._ asks students to repeat the words individually._ correct their pronunciation if necessary._ asks students to read the sentences suggested individually._ can read the sentences first and notice the sounds in

- Listen to the teacher.

Get the teacher’s explanation._ Listen to the sounds listed in their books._ Listen to the tape then repeat the words in chorus._ Some individuals repeat the words.

_ Listen to the teacher’s correction._ Read the sentences suggested individually.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

209

Page 210: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngwords._ asks some students to read the sentences aloud._ asks others to give comments then correct their pronunciation if necessary.3. Grammar: ( 25 minutes)Exercise1:- Giude students how to do- Do the first as an example.- Ask students to to the exercise.- Call the to to on board.- go round to help students if necessary- Explain and correct.

Exercise 2:_ explains the example carefully._ asks students to work in pairs to do the exercise suggested._ asks students to discuss the answers with their friends._ asks some of the students to do the exercise orally._ asks others to give comments. _ gives the suggested answers if necessary.

_ Listen to the teacher’s explanation._ work in pairs. Do the exercise given in the textbooks._ Discuss the answers with their friends then correct the mistakes themselves._ Some of the students to do the exercise orally._ Other students give comments._ Take notes of the suggested answers.Keys:1. So 5. So2. But 6. But3. So 7. But4. But 8. So_ Notice the teacher’s explanation._ Work in pairs. Do the exercise given in the textbooks._ Discuss the answers with their friends then correct the mistakes themselves.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

210

Page 211: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Exercise 3:_ explains the example carefully._ asks students to work in pairs to do the exercise suggested._ asks students to discuss the answers with their friends._ asks some of the students to do the exercise orally._ asks others to give comments. _ gives the suggested answers if necessary.

4. Homework: (2 minutes) - Ask students to revise the strong form and weak form of auxiliaries, the use of connections, redo all the exercises and prepare unit 10 at home.

_ Some of the students to do the exercise orally._ Other students give comments._ Take notes of the suggested answers.Keys:1. But 5. But2. However 6.However3. Yet 7. However4. So 8. But

_ Listen to the teacher’s explanation._ work in pairs. Do the exercise given in the textbooks._ Discuss the answers with their friends then correct the mistakes themselves._ Some of the students to do the exercise orally._ Other students give comments._ Take notes of the suggested answers.Keys:1. Therefore, 2. So, 3.So, 4. Therefore, 5. However,6. Therefore, 7. So,8. However.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

211

Page 212: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

- Listen to the teacher and write down homework to do at home

UNIT 10: endanger species

The 60 th period Date : 12/ 01/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: endanger speciesUnit 10ReadingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: - Students read and guess the meaning of words in contexts.

- They read and answer questions about the texts. - They practice scanning for specific information in the

texts. - Finding supporting evidence .2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Ss know some endangered species are plant and animal species - Language: Common knowledge of environment,… - New words: Words related to the topic (endangered animals,plants....)

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

212

Page 213: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng3. Skills: - Guessing meaning in context, scanning for specific information and passage comprehension.II. Method: - Integrated, mainly communicative.III. Teaching aids: -Picture, board, chalks, textbook, handouts,…IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)

Aims: to introduce the topic of the lesson and to raise students' interest.- T hang out some pictures in and asks Ss to answer the questions.1. what do you see in the pictures?2. Which of them are in danger of becoming extinct?

Before you read : (7 minutes)- Ask students (to work in pairs) to open their books, look at the pictures, and do the tasks that follow.+ which of the animals and insects below can be found in VietNam?+Which of them are in danger of becoming extinct?- Ask them to work in 3 minutes, - Teacher moves round to help if necessary. - Ask some pairs to report . - Give some remark if necessary

- work in pair to answer the questions 1.tortoise,rhinoceos,monkey, elephant,leopard,,parrot2.elephant,leopard, rhinoceos are in dangernecessary

+tortoise, rhinoceros,elephant, monkey,mosquito.+rhinoceros,leopard, elephant

- Write down the meaning of some newwords

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

213

Page 214: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngPre-teaching vocabulary: To Endanger: (v) g©y nguy hiÓmDestructio(n) sù ph¸ ho¹i .nguyen nh©n g©y ra c¸i chÕtCommercial(adj):(thuéc )bu«n b¸nDrainage(n): sù rót níc,hÖ thèng cèng r·nhDeforestration,urbanization (sù thµnh thÞ ho¸While you read : (23 minutes)- Ask students to look through the passage and read in silence- Help students read the passage- Explain pronunciation and meaning of new words which appear in the passageTask 1 : (3 minutes)- Ask students to read through the text once to find out some new words, guess the main idea.- Explain new words (give the Vietnamese equivalents),.- Ask students to work individually in 5 minutes to do this task.- Guide students to read through the passage , then focus on only the sentences surrounding the suggested words to do the task effectively.- Give students some more words that may be new/ unfamiliar to them.- Guide the students to read the word in chorus and individually.

- Read through the text find the new words, try to guess the meanings of those words in contexts: - Work individually to read the text and do task 11.C2.D3.A4.B

- Listen to the teacher- Write down the correct answers

- Read through the text find the new words,- Work in pair to answer the questions 1.D2.B

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

214

Page 215: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng-Give correct answers

Task 2: (4 minutes)- Ask students to read the passage again and choose A,B,C,D to complete the following sentencesabout the reading passage- Ask them to work individually to do the task and give the evidence to prove the keys.- Move round to make sure that all students are working and to help them if necessary.- Ask some students to report and give feedback.

Task 3: (6 minutes)- Ask students to read the passage again then work in pairs to find evidence in the passage to support these statements- Walk round the class to give help if necessary.- Give suggested words, phrases or useful suggestions.- Correct the students’ work.

After you read : (8 minutes)- Ask students to work in group to scan the text again.- Ask them to work in small groups of three or four to summarise the reading passage by writing one sentence for each paragraph. - Encourage them to summarise the reading passage.

3.A4.A5.D

- Read through the text find the new words,- Work in pair to give evidence in the passage to support these statements.1.The first sentence of the second passage.2.The third passage.3.The fourth .

- Work in group to summarise the reading passage.1.Over 24 thousand plant and animal species all over the world are classified as endangered.2.The main causes of extinction or endangerment are habitant destruction ,commercial exploitation and population.3.Biodiversity is important for humans as it provides

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

215

Page 216: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Ask one or two pairs to report.

Home work: (2 minutes) - Ask Ss to do exercises at paage 65-68 in the students’workbook.

food ,clean air,water,fertile soil and other products.4.Different efforts have been made to conser endangered species.5.The task of conservation should be shared by international organization,govermental agencies ,industry and individuals.

- Do homework

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

216

Page 217: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 61 st Period Date 15/ 01/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: endanger speciesUnit 10SpeakingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: - Students work in pairs to ask anh answer some questions about endangered animals - Students talk about the information of some endangered animals2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: endangered animals - Language: + The way to make suggestions or predictions. + The tenses.

- New words: words related to endangered species.3. Skills: - Talking about the information of some endangered animalsII. Method: - Integrated, mainly communicative.III. Teaching aids: - picture, board, chalks, textbook, handouts.IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)Hang out the pictures of 4 animals and ask Ss to give the name of them

- Look at the pictures ang give the name of 4 animals1.It is a tiger

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

217

Page 218: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

While-speaking (25 minutes)Task 1:Ask and answer the following the questions.- Ask students to work in pairs to discus the four questions and find the answers.- Move round to make sure that all students are working and to help them if necessary.- Ask some students to report and give feedback.- Correct the students’ work and give remark.

Task 2Ask and answer questions about 4 endangered animals.- Aks Ss to read the information about the gait panda,tiger,rhino,elephant.- Explain how to do task 2- Walk round from group to group to give help if necessary.- Encourage students to speak out what they think even a phrase or a singular word._T check ang give feedback.

2.It is a rhino3.It is a pandal4.It is an elephant

- Work in pairs to discus the three questions and find the answers.1.Pandal ,rhino,tiger,elephant.2.We can find these animals in the forests in Asia,Afica,etc3.Rhino can be used for medicine4.All of them are in danger.

- Listen to the teacher- work in pair to do task 2A:where do gaint pandas live?B: They live in bamboo forests in the mountain in central and western ChinaA: What is the population of pandas in the world?B: Only about 600.A: How are they?B: about 1.2 to 1.5m

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

218

Page 219: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Task 3:Take turns to give an oral report on the animals mentioned in task 2-T ask Ss to work in group to do task 2.- Walk round from group to group to give help if necessary.- Encourage students to speak out what they think .

Post – speaking(10)- Ask students to work individually to summarize what they’ve learnt in unit 10.- Move round to check the activities and to make sure that students are working effectively.- Ask one or two students to report in front of the whole class.- Check and give remarks.

Homework: (3 minutes)

A How much do they weigh?B: About 75 kg to 160 kgA: what do they eatB:BambooA: Why are they in danger?B: People destroy their habitat and hurt them for trade.

- Work in group to give an oral report.Group 1: Giant pandas live in bamboo forests in the moutain in Western China .only about 600 pandas are living there.They attain a height of 1.2m to 1.5m and wigh from 75kg to 160 kg they are in danger because People destroy their habitat and hurt them for trade.Group 2: RhinoGroup 3:tigerGroup 4 elephant

-Students work individually to summarize what they’ve learnt in unit 10.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

219

Page 220: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngName some measures we’ve made to protect the endanger animals

- Do homework at home

The 62 nd period Date : 19/ 01/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: endanger speciesUnit 10

ListeningTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: -Students know the life of gorillas2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: extensive listening: Multiple-choice questions. Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

220

Page 221: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng Gap filling - Language: modal verbs - New words: Words related to to the topic. 3. Skills: - Listening and deciding on True or False statements. - Listening comprehensionII. Method: - Intergrated, mainly communicative.III. Teaching aids: - Tape, board, chalks, textbook.IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Rearange the letters to make a meaningful word GOLLARI

Pre-listening: (7 minutes)- Ask students to work in pairs to discuss and choose the best answer A,B,C- Guide the students to answer if necessary.- Give further information.

- Explain the words that will appear in the listening text.- Ask students to read in chorus then individually.

While-listening: (20 minutes)Task 1- Ask students to read the

statement at least once first.

- Ask them to guess the

- Listen to the teacher.- Work in pairs to Rearrange the letters to make a meaningful work. GORILIA- Work in pairs to discuss and give correct answers- Listen and repeat:

GorillaSociableSub-adultNestBared teethSilverbackCivil warForest rangers

-Read the statement once to get the

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

221

Page 222: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

answers- Play the tape once then

check how many answers can students find.

- Play the tape again.- Check and give remarks.- Call some sts to say out

their answers and the evidences they get to prove their answers.

Task 2- Ask them to guess the

answers.- Play the tape once then

check how many answers can sts find.

- Play the tape again.- Check and give remarks.- Call some students to say out their answers and the evidences they get to prove their answers

main contents.- Listen to the tape

and do the task.- Find evidences to

each of the answers.

- Represent if being asked.

Keys: 1.A2.B3.D4.B5.C- Listen to the teacher’s explanation then correct the answers onself.

- Read the questions once to get the main contents.

- Listen to the tape and do the task.

- Find evidences to each of the answers.

- Represent if being asked.

1.peaceful2.plant – eating3.a few females and their young4.plants and a few insects5.in trees6.in grasses

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

222

Page 223: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

After-listening: (10 minutes)- In group, ask students to summarise the main ideas of the passage ,using the information and the answers in task 1 and 2.- Move around to help if necessary.- Give remarks or even suggestions.

Homework: (3 minutes)- in not more than 80 words write about the life of a gorilla

7.civil war8.forests being cut down

- Listen to the teacher’s explanation then correct the answers oneself..- Listen to the teacher’s guide to correct oneself.

-Work in group to summarise the main ideas of the passage

-Listen to the teacher and write down homework

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

223

Page 224: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 63 rd period Date: 02/ 02/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: endanger speciesUnit 10

WritingTime 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: - Writing a report. 2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Writing about measures to protect

endangered species and possible results - Language: +The tenses.

+ Connectors - New words: Words related to endangered species 3. Skills: - Writing a report.II. Method: - Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: - A picture, board, chalks, textbook.

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)Fill in the chart with some informatio n about endangered species’ problems.Endangered

causes Measures to

- Do as required. - Exchange the ideas with others.

- Listen to the teacher.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

224

Page 225: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngspecies save

them+tiger Habitat

destruction

Provide enough wildlife hanitat reserves

Pre-writing: (10 minutes)- Explain as clearly as possible the way to write a passage+topic sentence+supporting idea+supporting idea+Concluding sentence+conectors:first,second,third....While-writing: (18 minutes)Task 1- Ask students to look at Task

1.- In pairs, ask students to ask

and answer the questions.- Move around to give help.- Check and give remarks.

- Get the task.

- Work in pairs to do the task.

- Listen to the teacher to correct oneself.

- Work in groups to do the task.

- Listen to the teacher.

- Get the task.

- Work in pairs to do the task.

- Listen to the teacher to correct oneself.

Work in groups to do the task1.We should have different activities to raise people ‘s awareness of the need to protect these animals.2.Goverments should raise sufficient funds for

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

225

Page 226: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Task 2- Explain the requirements: Writing a paragraph- Ask students to work in groups to write paragraph.- Walk round to give help if necessary.

Post-writing: (10 minutes)- Ask some groups to represent their work, ask other to give remark.- Choose some good writing to read in class and give remark.Homework: (2 minutes)- Ask students to rewrite the task at home and preapare part Language Focus at home.

projects to save endangered animals.3.Humans must keep water ,air,and land clean to preserve natural habitats for wild animals.4.Goverments should have a good policy to improve the life of people who live in or near endangered animals’ habitats

- Compare the result to the other groups.

- Listen to the teacher’s explanations.

- Exchange the writing to other groups to check and give remarks.

- Represent the task on board if being asked.- Read the writing

to get others’ remarks.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

226

Page 227: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

- Do as the teacher asked.

- Listen to the teacher and write down homework.

The 64 th period Date: 04/ 02/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: endangered speciesUnit 10

Language FocusTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives: Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

227

Page 228: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng1. Educational aim: - Pronuciation. - Rhythm2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: modal verbs: may, might,must’nt, - Language: may, might,must, must’nt... - New words: Words related to the exercises3. Skills: - Writing sentences with adverbial clauses of concession.II. Method: - Intergrated, mainly communicative.III. Teaching aids: - Board, chalks, textbook and notebook.IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Notes1. Pronunciation:( 15 minutes)- Explain the way to stress syllables- Help students to know the pronunciation- Play the tape- Ask Ss to repeat- Listen to Ss and check

- Get the teacher’s explanation.

1.Tell me the time.2. Show me the way .3. Some carrots and cabbages4.Come for a swim5.The clock on the mantelpiece6. I think he wants to go tomorrow7.It’s not the one I want.8.Most of them have arrived on the bus9.Walk down the path to the end of the canal10.I’m going home today for Christmas

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

228

Page 229: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

2. Grammar and vocabulary:( 28 minutes)- Explain once again Modal verbs(may ,might,must,musn’t ,needn’tRemarks:- May ,might ®îc dïng ®Ó chØ mét kh¶ n¨ng .- Must ®îc dïng ®Ó chØ mét tr¸ch nhiÖm hoÆc mét bæn phËn .must cã nghÜa ph¶i lµm ,kh«ng cã sù lùa chän- Need dîc dïng dÓ diÔn t¶ sù cÇn thiÕtPracticeExercise 1:- Guide the students how to

do the exercises.- Divide the class into groups,

ask them to do the exercises.

- Walk round to give help if necessary.- Correct the students’ work

if necessary.

11.A bird in the hand is

worth two in the bush.12. If you don’t have the best ,make the best of what you have.- Practice reading

in chorus or individually.

-Listen to the teacher and copy

-Work in group to do exercisesExercise1:1. might rain2. may/might wake3. may/might bite4. may/might need5. may/might slip6. may/might break.Exercise 2:1.needn’t come2.needn’t walk3.needn’t ask4.needn’t tell5.needn’t explain.Exercise 3:

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

229

Page 230: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

3. Homework: (1 minute) - Ask students to review the lesson and do the language task students’ workbook and prepare Test yourself D at home.

1.must 2.mustn’t3.Needn’t4.must5.musn’t6.needn’t7.needn’t8.must,mustn’t

- Listen to the teacher and write down correct answers

- Do homework at home

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

230

Page 231: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 65 th period Date : 05/ 02/ 2009Grade 12 Test yourself D

I. Objectives: After this lesson, students will be able to:- Check themselves their skills in reading, speaking,

listening, writing.- Improve their knowledge through the test yourself.

II. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative.II. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, cassetteplayer, board, hand-outs…IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Greeting- Ask students something about the test yourself D* Have you prepared it at home?* Have you got any difficulties?

Test yourself

I. Listening(2.5 points) (10 minutes)- Present the task: Listen and complete the table below- Tell students the topic of the table- Get students to look through the table

- Greeting- Answer teacher’s questions

- Look at the book and listen to the task- understand the task- Listen to the tape carefully- Fill in the blanks

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

231

Page 232: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Explain the meaning of new words- After that turn on the tape of the passage aloud twice- Let students fill in the blanks with the words they have just heard- Go round the class to control the work- Then turn on the tape of the passage the last time for students to check their results- Correct mistakesII. Reading (2.5 points) (10 minutes)- Present the task: Read the passgae and choose the statements are True or False.- Get students to work in groups, discuss about the passage- Go round the class to control the discussion- State the best option- Correct mistakes

III. Grammar(2.5 points) (8 minutes)- Recall the grammar of articals.- Giude students how to do- Give them some newwords:- Do the first as an example.- Ask students to to the exercise.- Call the to to on board.- Go round the class to control the set’s activities- State the keys

with the words they’ve just heard- Correct mistakes

Keys:1. bamboo shoots, leaves, 2. 12, 3. 600, 4. half, 5. cloning (the panda).

- Look at the textbook and listen to the teacher then read the passage and choose the statements are True or False.- Work in groups to discuss about the passage- Finish the task- Compare their results with the other groups, and correct.Keys:1. F, 2. N, 3. T, 4. T, 5. T.

- Listen to the teacher- Work in groups to complete the sentences- Compare the results with the other groups- Correct mistakesKeys:1. needn’t, must, mustn’t, 2. mustn’t, 3. needn’t, must, 4. mustn’t,

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

232

Page 233: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Correct mistakes

IV. Writing(2.5 points) (7 minutes)- Giude students how to write- Give students some models and structures to writes..- Ask students to write.- Call the to to on board.- Go round the class to control the students’ activities- Correct mistakes

Homework (5 minutes)- Ask students: + to study all the lessons again

5. mustn’t, 6. mustn’t,7. needn’t.

- Listen to the teacher carefully.- Work in groups or in pairs then write.- Compare the results with the other groups.

- Correct mistakes

- Study all the lessons again

UNIT 11: BooksThe 66 th period Date : 06/ 02/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: BooksUnit 11ReadingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: - Students read and guess the meaning of words in contexts.

- Deciding on true or false statement. - Passage cpmprehension2. Knowledge: Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

233

Page 234: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng - General knowledge: Ss know many advantages of reading books - Language: Common knowledge of books - New words: Words related to the topic 3. Skills: - Guessing meaning in context, scanning for specific information and passage comprehension.II. Method: - Integrated, mainly communicative.III. Teaching aids: -Picture, board, chalks, textbook, handouts,…IV. Procedure:Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)Aims: to introduce the topic of the lesson and to raise students' interest.-Ask SS to look at the pictures in the text book and answer some questions:1.what are they doing?2.can you name some advantages of reading books?-Ask Ss to work in pair to answer the questions-T goes around to help if neccesaryBefore you read : (7 minutes)- Ask students (to work in pairs) to open their books, look at the pictures, and do the tasks that follow.1.Do you often read books?2.What kind of books do you enjoin reading most/least?3.How do you read books?- Ask them to work in 3 minutes, meanwhile the teacher moves round to help if

-Work in pair to answer the questions.1.they are reading books2.enrich knowlege And Relax ....

- work in pair to answer the question.1.usually2.Ennglish books 3.every time

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

234

Page 235: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngnecessary. - Ask some pairs to report . - Give some remark if necessaryWhile you read : (23 minutes)- Ask students to look through the passage and read in silence- Help students read the passage- Explain pronunciation and meaning of new words which appear in the passageTask 1 : (3 minutes)- Ask students to read through the text once to find out some new words, guess the main idea.- Explain new words (give the Vietnamese equivalents), guide the sts to get the main contents of the reading text.- Ask students to work individually in 5 minutes to do this task.- Guide students to read through the passage , then focus on only the sentences surrounding the suggested words to do the task effectively.- Give students some more words that may be new/ unfamiliar to them.- Guide the students to read the word in chorus and individually. Task 2:Decide whether the

- Work individually to read the text then do task 11.swallow:nuèt(®äc ngèn ngÊu)2.dip into:chÊm qua loa(®äc qua loa)3.taste:nÕm(®äc thö ,qua loa)4.hard-to-pick –up-again:khã cã thÓ cÇm lªn l¹i ®îc)5.digest:tiªu ho¸6.chew:nhai(nghiÒn ngÉm)7.hard-to –put –down:kh«ng thÓ ®Æt xuèng

Work in pair to give answers.- Share the key with other Ss.1.NM2.F3.NM4.T5.F- Find in the text the evidence to prove the keys.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

235

Page 236: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngstatements given in task 2 page 120 are true ,false or not mentioned- Ask students to read through the text once to find out some new words, guess the main idea.- Explain new words (give the Vietnamese equivalents), guide the sts to get the main contents of the reading text.- Ask students to work individually in 5 minutes to do this task.- Guide students to read through the passage , then focus on only the sentences surrounding the suggested words to do the task effectively.- Call on some Ss to do task 2 on the board- Check Task 3: (4 minutes)- Ask students to read the passage again and answer th equestions - Ask them to work individually to do the task and give the evidence to prove the keys.- Move round to make sure that all students are working and to help them if necessary.- Ask some students to report and give feedback.

- Do the task in pairs:- Answer the questions.1. Three2.When you find a good story and have time to enjoin it.3.Read a few pages to see it it’s the one you can easily read and understand.4.Television can bring you all the information and stories with colour picture and action.5.Books are still a cheap way to get information and entertainment ;you can keep a book forever and read it many times.

- Listen to the teacher- Work in group to do the task.a.thrillerb.romancec.noveld.sciencee.craftf.fictiong.comic

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

236

Page 237: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

After you read : (8 minutes)- Ask students to work in group to scan the text again.- Ask them to work in small groups of three or four to do the task.- Ask one or two pairs to report.- Move round to make sure that all students are working and to help them if necessary.- Ask some students to report and give feedback.

Home work: (2 minutes) - Do exercise 1 and two at page 71,72,73 in the students’ workbook

h.biograph

- Write down the homework to do at home.

The 67 th Period Date: 08/ 02/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: BooksUnit 11SpeakingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: - Asking and answering about reading habits - Talking aboout characters in a book.2. Knowledge: - General knowledge:Books. - Language: + The way to descirbe a book + The tenses.

- New words: words related to Books

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

237

Page 238: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng3. Skills: - Discribing details in pictures. - Talking about characters in a book.II. Method: - Integrated, mainly communicative.III. Teaching aids: - picture, board, chalks, textbook, handouts.IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Ask Ss to give name of some stories

Pre-speaking : (12 minutes)Task 1- Complete the following conservation and practise reading it.- Explain how to do the task-Ask students to work in pairs to discus the three questions and find the answers.- Correct the students’ work and give remark.

While-speaking : (15 minutes)Task 2- Explain the requirements - Divide the class into groups,

Listen and give one’s own ideas .1.fairy story2.historical story3.detective story4.war story5.adventure story

- Work in pairs to discus the three questions and find the answers.A:what sort(kind) of books do you like to read?A;How do you often read books?A:When do you often readbooks?- Correct the answers oneself.

- Listen to the teacher

A; What do you Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

238

Page 239: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngasks each group to discus a section- Guide the students how to speak by giving them useful suggestions:- Walk round from group to group to give help if necessary.- Encourage students to speak out what they think even a phrase or a singular word.

Task 3:- Complete the following conservation and practise reading it.- Explain how to do the task-Ask students to work in pairs to discus the three questions and find the answers.- Correct the students’ work and give remark.

Task 4:- Explain how to do the task-Ask students to work in pairs to discus the three questions and find the answers.-Practise the model consevation with one student-Ask Ss to do task 4

often do in your free time?B: Reading booksA:What sort of books do you often read?B:novels.A:How do you read them?B:When I find a good storyA:When do you often read books?B: Whenever I have free time

- Work in pairs to discus the three questions and find the answers.A;What are you reading at the moment?A:Who is the main character?A:What is he/she like/

-Listen and work in pairs to do task 4A;What are you reading at the moment?B:I”m reading “happy life”A:Who is the main character?B:Jonh.A;What is he like?B; ........

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

239

Page 240: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngPost-speaking : (10 minutes)Task 5- Ask students to work individually to summarize what they’ve discussed in their own words.- Move round to check the activities and to make sure that students are working effectively.- Ask one or two students to report in front of the whole class.- Check and give remarks.

Homework: (3 minutes)Do Exercises at page 75&76 in the students’workbook

- Listen and take note

- Write down the homework

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

240

Page 241: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 68 th period Date : 10/ 02/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: Books Unit 11

ListeningTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: -Ss know some advantages of books2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Listen for specific information. - Language: The present simple tense. - New words: Words related to to the topic. 3. Skills: - Listening and deciding on True or False statements. - Listening comprehensionII. Method: - Intergrated, mainly communicative.III. Teaching aids: - Tape, board, chalks, textbook.IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Ask Ss to decide on 3 statements True or False

Pre-listening: (7 minutes)

- Explain the words that will appear in the listening text.- Ask students to read in chorus then individually.

- Listen to the teacher.

- Listen and repeat:IncredibleWildernessFascinatingUnnoticedJourneyPeronalitySurviveRenioned

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

241

Page 242: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngWhile-listening: (20 minutes)Task 1- Ask students to read the

statement at least once first.

- Ask them to guess the answers

- Play the tape once then check how many answers can students find.

- Play the tape again.- Check and give remarks.- Call some sts to say out

their answers and the evidences they get to prove their answers.

Task 2- Ask them to guess the

answers.- Play the tape once then

check how many answers can sts find.

- Play the tape again.- Check and give remarks.- Call some students to say out their answers and the evidences they get to prove their answers

After-listening: (10 minutes)- In group, ask students to discus the guided question,

- Read the statement once to get the main contents.

- Listen to the tape and do the task.

- Find evidences to each of the answers

Keys: 1. B, 2. C, 3. B, 4. A, 5. A, - Listen to the teacher’s explanation then correct the answers onself.

- Read the questions once to get the main contents.

- Listen to the tape and do the task.

1;family2.strength3.humans4.journey5.pet.- Listen to the teacher’s explanation then correct the answers oneself.

- In groups, ask and answer the question.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

242

Page 243: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngfind the answer.- Move around to help if necessary.- Give remarks or even suggestions.

Homework: (3 minutes)- In not more than 50 words write about the kind of books you like to read and say why

S1: would you like to read the book ?S2: Yes,S1: Why?S2:because I want to know about animal’s life......- Listen to the teacher’s guide to correct oneself.

-Listen to the teacher and write down homework

The 69 th period Date: 12/ 02/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: Books Unit 11

WritingTime 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: - Describing a book 2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: writing a report on a book - Language: +The tenses.

+ Connectors (time expressions) - New words: Words related to books3. Skills: - Writing a report.II. Method: - Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: - A picture, board, chalks, textbook.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

243

Page 244: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Free talk about the name what yo should mention in book report

Pre-writing(10 minutes) Give some ideas Book report+the book’s author+the title of the book+the main character+your opinionWhile-writing: (18 minutes)Task 1- Ask students to look at Task

1.- In group, ask students to

put the questions to under the correct headings

- Move around to give help.- Check and give remarks.

Do as required.Exchange the ideas with others.

- Listen to the teacher.

- Get the task.

- Work in group to do the task.

S1:general introduction7.What is the title of the book?4.who is the author?9.What type of book is it? S2:Summary of the book’s content2.where is the book set?5.What is the main theme of the book?6.who are the main characters?8.what is the plot of the story?S3:Conclusion:1.What was your opinion of the book?3.would you

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

244

Page 245: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Task 2- Explain the requirements:

Ask and answer the above questions about the book you have just read

- Ask students to work in groups to write report.- Walk round to give help if necessary.

recommend the book?- Listen to the

teacher to correct oneself.

- Work in groups to do the task.

S1: 7.What is the title of the book?S2: Frankenstein

S1;4.who is the author?S2:Marry Shelley

S1:9.What type of book is it? S2:A horror storyt

S1: 2.where is the book set?S2: Geneva

S1:5.What is the main theme of the book?S2:life of frankenstein,a monster

S1:6.who are the main characters?S2: FrankensteinS1:8.what is the plot of the story?S2:a student from geneva ,discovers the secret of

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

245

Page 246: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Post-writing: (10 minutes) - Ask Ss to write a report on the book you have read recently based on the results of task 1 and 2

- Ask some groups to represent their work, ask other to give remark.- Choose some good writing to read in class and give remark.

Homework: (2 minutes)- Ask students to rewrite the task at home and preapare part Language Focus at home.

life,constructers a creature more like a monster ,monster feels lonely ,attacks and kills Frankenstein’s friend,and his brother:Frankenstein detrmined to kill the monster:he is killes first by the monster ,then it kills itself

S1:1.What was your opinion of the book?S2:interesting

S1:3.would you recommend the book?S2: yes

- Compare the result to the other groups.

- Listen to the teacher’s explanations.

- Exchange the writing to other groups to check and give remarks.

- Listen to the teacher and write

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

246

Page 247: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

down homework.

The 70 th period Date: 14/ 02/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: BooksUnit 11

Language FocusTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: - Rhythm - Modals in the passivevoice 2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: review the uses of the passive voice

with modal verbs - Language: Know how to use modals in the passive voice - New words: Words related to the exercises3. Skills: - Writing sentences with modals in the passive voiceII. Method: - Intergrated, mainly communicative.III. Teaching aids: - Board, chalks, textbook and notebook.IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Notes1. Pronunciation:( 15 minutes)- Explain the rhythm- Help students to know the pronunciation.- Practice:1.Why did you behave like that ?2.Come for a swim3.I think it will be find4.She’s gone for a walk in the

- Get the teacher’s explanation.

- Practice reading in chorus or individually.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

247

Page 248: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngpark5.I wonder if he’ll ever come back-Let Ss to listen to the tape2. Grammar and vocabulary:( 28 minutes)- Explain once again the “Modals with passive voiceModals +be+past participleModals+be+pastparticipleExercise1:rewrite the sentences in the passive- Guide the students how to

do the exercises.- Divide the class into groups,

ask them to do the exercises.

- Walk round to give help if necessary.- Correct the students’ work

if necessary.

Exercise2;Complete the conservation with the suitable passive form of the verbs in brackets

- Guide the students how to

Exercise1:7. This machine

mustn’t be used after 5.30 p.m

8. This machine must cleaned evry tine you use it

9. The flowers should be kept in a warm sunny place

10. Your bill should be paid before you leave the hotel

11. we should be given the information now

12. Toothpaste can be bought at the drugstore

13. The children should be warned not to speak to strangers

14. The mystery can’t be solved

15. Travelers’cheques can be exchanged at most banks

16. She shouldn’t be told the news.It might kill her

Exercise 2:1.will be prepared

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

248

Page 249: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

do the exercises.- Divide the class into groups,

ask them to do the exercises.

- Walk round to give help if necessary.- Correct the students’ work

if necessary.

3. Homework: (1 minute) Exercise 3,4 and 5 page 74and 75 in the student’s work book

2. Is food going to be cooked?

3. will be pre-packaged

4. can be warmed5. should food be

chosen6. has to be

offered7. could be

selected8. ought to be

made

- Listen to the teacher and write down homework to do at home

The 71 st period Date : 16/ 02/ 2009Grade 12

Së Gi¸o Dôc §µo T¹o Th¸i B×nhTrêng THPT NguyÔn Tr·i

The Second-term 45-minute Test 12th

Form (Time allowance: 45 minutes)

A. PRONUNCIATION : Choose the word which has the underlined part pronounced differently from the rest:

1. A. punch B. synchronized C. technology D. chemical2. A. lie B. goalie C. tie D. die 3. A. caps B. posts C. swimmers D. books

Choose the word whose main stress is placed differently from the others:4. A. goalie B. football C. water D. depend5. A. personal B. environment C. defensive D. decision

B. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR: Choose one word or phrase that best fits the blank space in each sentence:6. _____ the start of each period, both teams line up on their own goal line.

A. In B. For C. At D. From7. A water polo ball is constructed of waterproof material to allow it to float _______ the water.

A. on B. over C. above D. in

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

249

Page 250: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng8. There are six field player positions and a goalkeeper ______ each team.

A. from B. with C. on D. for9. Players can move the ball by throwing it _______ a teammate or swimming while pushing the ball in front of them.

A. for B. to C. into D. from10. We were very excited _______ the game last night.

A. in B. at C. on D. about11. They are going to _______ the pool to 1.8 meter.

A. deepen B. depth C. deep D. deeply12. The referee had no hesitation in awarding the visiting team a _______.

A. penal B. penalize C. penalty D. penalization13. The referee's _______ is the most important in any sport competition.

A. decide B. decision C. decisive D. decider14. _______ players are not allowed to interfere with the opponent's movements unless the player is holding the ball.

A. Defense B. Defensively C. Defender D. Defensive15. _______ is a sport in which two or more people perform complicated and carefully planned movements in water in time to music.

A. Synchronized swimming B. Windsurfing C. Diving D. Rowing16. If a defender _______ a foul within the five meter area that prevents a likely goal, the attacking team is awarded a penalty throw or shot.

A. punches B. interferes C. commits D. touches17. The more goals the players _______, the more exciting the match became.

A. marked B. scored C. made D. sprinted18. After a tie, there are two overtime periods of three minutes each.

A. penalty B. goal C. score D. draw19. I have never taken part in any water sports _______ I cannot swim.

A. because of B. because C. due to D. despite20. Many people do not like scuba diving _______.

A. because of dangerous B. because it is dangerous C. because its danger D. due to it is dangerous

21. The news of war _______ and the world. A. shocked the nation B. was shocked by the nation C. shocking the nation D. shocked

by the nation22. The player _______ his hat-trick.

A. will reward for B. will be rewarded C. will reward D. will be rewarded for

23. Before the end of the term, I _______ all the required reading.A. was finished by B. had been finished by C. had been finished D. had

finished24. Sara speaks _______ fast that I can't understand her.

A. so B. very C. too D. less 25. Would you mind _______ me a hand with this bag?

A. give B. giving C. to give D. to giving 26. “Thank you very much for a lovely party.” - “________”. A. Thanks B. Have a good day C. You’re welcome D. Cheers 27. When I came to visit her last night, she ________ a bath. A. is having B. was having C. were having D. had 28. Dien Bien Phu is the place ________ our army won a resounding victory in 1954. A. where B. that C. what D. which 29. I knew they were talking about me ________ they stopped when I entered the room. A. because B. so that C. however D. therefore 30. “ I’m sorry for keeping you waiting so long.” – “_______.”

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

250

Page 251: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

A. Thank you B. Me, too C. I’m sorry D. That’s all right

C. ERROR IDENTIFICATION : Identify one underlined word or phrase that is incorrect:31. Since 1984 the sport has included in the Olympic Games as part of the yachting events.

A B C D32. The sport was became very popular in Europe and by the late 70's there was windsurfing fever in Europe

A B C with one in every three households having a sailboard.

D33. The first world championship of windsurfing held in 1973.

A B C D34. My family spent an interested holiday in Europe last summer. A B C D 35. They asked me what did I do last night, but I was unable to tell them. A B C D

D. Make the correct choice to complete each sentence:36. We lived in that ______ on the corner.

A. old house brick small B. brick small old house C. small old brick house D. house brick small old

37. He took his seat quietly ________. A. so as not to disturb their conversation B. so as to disturb their conversation C. in order not disturb their conversation D. in order for him not to disturb their

conversation 38. If I had enough money, ______.

A. I will buy that house B. I could buy that houseC. I can buy that house D. I would have bought that house

39. _____ that no one would ask for tips. A. The tourists found it strange B. The tourist were strange to find C. The tourists found strange D. It found strange tourists

40. Dr Sales is the person____. A. in that I don’t have much confidence B. whom I don’t have much confidence in

him C. I don’t have much confidence D. in whom I don’t have much confidence

Unit 12 : Water sportsThe 72 nd period Date : 18/ 02/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: Water SportsUnit 12ReadingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: By the end of this lesson, students learn

about water sports and they have knowledge to play it

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

251

Page 252: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: Students can understand rules of playing

water sports- Language: - New words: Words related to water sports3. Skills: - Guessing meaning from context

- Passage comprehension- Reading for specific information

II. Method: Integrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: textbooks, some pictures of water sportsIV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Hangs up 2 pictures of water sport and football - Asks some questions:1. What kinds of sports are in the pictures?2. Where can people play these sports?3. How do people play them?4. Which sport do you think is more popular?- Leads in new lesson: Water sports Before you read : (7 minutes)- Ask students to close the books - Shows 2 pictures and says: the sport in picture A is “water polo” and in picture B, the read team plays against the white team, so the red one is the “opponent” of the white one.- Explains some new words if necessary

- Look at pictures and answer all the questions

- Answer freely

- Look at pictures and guess meaning of 2 new words

- Listen to the teacher and write down

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

252

Page 253: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngWater polo (n) : Moân boùng nöôùc- Tie (n) : Traän hoaø- Vertical (a) : Phöông thaúng ñöùng- Foul (n) : Phaïm luaät , sai soùt- Oppenent (n) : Ñoái thuû , ñoái phöông- Penalty (n) : Hình phaït- Eject (v) : Ñaåy ra , toáng ra,ñuoåi ra- Goalie (n) : Ngöôøi giöõ khung thµnh

While you read : (23 minutes)- Asks students to open the books and read the passage silently- Lets students do task 1 Task 1 : - Asks students to do the task invidually then compare answers with partner- Checks answers with the whole class and gives feedback

Task 2: - Asks students to do the task in pairs and read scan the passage to find information in the text to fill words in the blanks- Goes round to give help- Checks answers and give feedback

- Read individually

- Do the task independentlyKey:1. e 2. c 3.a 4.b 5.d

- Work in pairs and do the taskKey:1. 18 ; 30 metres; 20 metres2. white caps; blue caps; red caps with the number 1 in white.3. Their own goal lines.4. Holding or punching the ball.5. Five to eighty minutes.

- Do independently first then work in pairs

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

253

Page 254: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Task 3: - Ask students to find answers for all questions in the passage individually first, then compare in pairs- Calls some students to present their answers in front of the class - Listens to the students and corrects mistakes- Calls on some students to write answers on the board- Corrects mistakes again

After you read : (8 minutes)- Divides the class into 2 groups: one talks about football and another talks about water polo- Asks students to do as the table in textbook- Maybe asks students some

- Present answers in front of the class and correct in notebook

Key:1. People can play it in a pool.2. It is in the centre of the pool.3.The ball can be advanced by passing with one hand or swimming with the head above the water and the balol between the arm so it rides on the wave create by the swimming’s head4. Only the goalie can hold/ is allowed to hold the ball with both hands.5. The player is ejected after committing fivepersonal fouls.

- Work in 2 groups

- Do the task

- Representative of each group expresses

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

254

Page 255: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngquestions:1. Would you like to try water polo? Why or why not?2. Do you think it’s more or less dangerous than football or other sports? Why?- Goes round to help- Calls each group to present- Gives comments

Home work: (2 minutes)- Asks students to write a paragraph about ideas of water polo (about 100 words)- Asks students to prepare part B. Speaking at home

the own ideas in front of the class- Listen to their friend’s talking and give comment

- Listen to the teacher and write down

The73 rd Period Date: 20/ 02/ 2009 Grade 12

Theme: Water sportsUnit 12SpeakingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: By the end of this lesson, students can

talk about some water sports that they prefer2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Students learn about some water sports- Language: asking and answering about water sports- New words: words related to water sports3. Skills: - Talking about types of water sports

- Giving opinions and preferences about water sportsII. Method: integrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: pictures, textbooksIV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesPre- speaking: (5 minutes) Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

255

Page 256: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Ask students to keep book close- Says: “In just one minute, look at the pictures and write down on a piece of paper a list of equipments which are used to play with these types of water sports”- Asks students to work in groups- Calls some groups to speak their answers- Declares the winner

While-speaking : (15 minutes)Task 1- Ask students to look at pictures and match names of equipments with names of water sports and retell names of each sport- Calls some students to speak- Correct pronunciation

Task 2- Asks students to look at the table and talk about each type of water sports- Lets students do individually- Goes round to check their activities- Calls some students to practise speaking model converstations- Asks students practise in pairs

- Keep books close- Listen to the teacher- Look at the pictures and try to tell some equipments of water sports (ex: ball, air tank, mask, fins, oars, boat, board, regulator, wet suit, sail ect. )

- Look at pictures and try to remember- Correct pronunciation themselves1. Swimming 4. Windsurfing2. Water polo 5. Scuba- diving3. Synchronized swimming 6. Rowing- Look at the book

- Work independently

- Practise speaking with the teacher- Work in pairs- Listen to their friends

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

256

Page 257: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Calls some pairs to present in front of the class and corrects mistakes

Post-speaking : (10 minutes)Task 3- Asks students to work in small groups to talk about their favourite water sports following examples- Goes round to provide help- Calls some students to speak loudly in front of the class- Corrects pronunciation and gives comments- Gives marks

Homework: (3 minutes)- Ask students to prepare Part C- Listening and do homework

- Work in small groups

- Listen to their friends and gives comments

- Listen to the teacher

- Listen to the teacher- Write down the homework

The 74 th period Date : 22/ 02/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: Water sportsUnit 12ListeningTime: 45 minutes

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

257

Page 258: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngI. Objectives:1. Educational aim: By the end of this lesson, students will

understand synchronized swimming2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Students learn more about synchronized swimming- New words: Words related to synchronized swimming3. Skills: - Listening and choosing multiple-choice questions - Listening and understanding comprehension questionsII. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Student’s bookIV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesPre-listening: (8 minutes)- Asks students to close the books- Asks some questions:1. Where are they playing?2. What are the special features of this sport?3. Is it a popular sport?- Lets students read some new words first in chorus then read individually- Calls some students to read new words- Corrects pronunciation

While-listening: (20 minutes)Task 1- Ask students to read 5 multiple-choice questions in the books first and underline key words- Plays the tape 2 times and lets students to do the task- Checks the answers and asks

- Close the books- Listen to the teacher- Answer freely- It is like ballet. It is the combination of diving and gymnastics.- Read in chorus then individually

- Read questions

- Listen to the tape carefully and then do the task- Give answers:1-B- 2-C- 3-A- 4-B-

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

258

Page 259: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngstudents to give evidences- Gives feedback

Task 2- Asks students to read questions to understand the content- Asks students to listen to the tape once again to answer the questions- Calls some students to answers questions- Calls 5 students to write the answers on the board- Corrects mistakes

After-listening: (15 minutes)- Asks students to talk about history of synchronized swimming using the cues in the books- Asks students to work in groups to practise- Goes round to provide help- Calls some groups to present- Gives comments

Homework: (2 minutes)- Remember them to prepare Part- Writing at home

5-A

- Read the questions first

- Listen to the tapeKey:1. The great Australian swimmer, Annette Kellerman did.2. She found a water ballet club in 1923.3. Curtis did.4. They were conducted in 1946.5. It became an Olympic event in 1984.

- Work in groups to practise

- Listen to their friends and correct mistakes

- Listen to the teacher

-Listen to the teacher and write down homework

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

259

Page 260: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 75 th period Date: 24/ 02/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: Water SportsUnit 12WritingTime 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: By the end of this lesson, students will

know some ways of instructing when playing sports

2. General knowledge: Students learn how to give instructions

- Language: Instructing - New words: Words related to instructed words3. Skills: Writing to give instructionsII. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Student’s book, notebookIV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesPre-writing: (5 minutes)- Asks students to keep book close- Asks students a question: What do you often do before practising sports?- Leads in new lesson: “Today we will have to write the instructions for warming up

- Keep book close- Listen to the teacher and answer the question: We have to do warming up exercises.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

260

Page 261: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngexercises before swimming.

While-writing: (18 minutes)Task 1- Asks students to read task 1 - Asks students to work in pairs to match each sentence with one appropriate action- Goes round to provide help- Calls 2 students for each checking: one reads instructions and one practise - Supplies more word phrases:bend forward/ left/ rightfeet apart/ feet touchingput your hands to the sidesraise your hands aboveor some conjuntions: first, then, after that, finally ect.Post-writing: (20 minutes)Task 2- Asks students to look at the picture in taks 2 and use some useful expression above to write the instructions for one warm-up exercise before playing water polo- Asks students to write individually- Goes round to help- Lets students deliver to check mistakes in groups - Calls one student to write on the board- Gives comments and gives mark

- Read the task- Work in pairs

- Practise the task

- Listen to the teacher and copy down

- Look at the picture and do the task

- Do independently

- Work in groupsKey:1. Set yourself in vertical position.2. Stand with your feet apart, raise your hands above your head.3. Bend forward, fingertips touch the ground.4. Then bend again,

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

261

Page 262: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Homework: (2 minutes)- Ask students to do part writing of Unit 1 in the student’s work book and preapare part Language Focus

fingertips touch the ground between the feet.5. Finally put each arm back to the first position.

- Listen to the teacher and write down homework

The 76 th period Date: 27/ 02/ 2009 Grade 12

Theme: Water SportsUnit 12Language FocusTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: By the end of this lesson, students will be

able to:- pronounce the words that have deaf sounds- review grammar point: transitive and intransitive verbs

2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Students learn how to use elision and

transitive and intransitive verbs- Language: - Transitive and intransitive verbs Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

262

Page 263: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

- Elision- New words: Words related to elision3. Skills: Pronoucing elision and using transitive and intransitive verbsII. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Student’s bookIV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesPronunciation: (8 minutes)- Ask students to read words following the tape*Listen and repeat : - Read loudly then ask students to repeat- Introduce : elision- Correct pronunciation for the students* Practise these sentences- Read the sentences loudly- Ask students to repeat- Correct pronunciation for studentsGrammar and vocabulary:(4 minutes)- Introduce exercises to the students- Let students see all sentences in part Pronunciation and give comments of verbs- Gives explaination:1. verbs + obj = transitive verbs2. verbs + not obj = intransitive verbs- Asks students to make questions with “who/ whom/ what” in pairs- Calls some students to give

- Read follow the tape

- Read in chorus then individually

- Listen to the tape and practise speaking

- Listen to the teacher- Read the sentences and underline verbs- Give comments:1. the verbs “do, like, climb, deliver” + Obj2. the verbs “sleep” + no Obj- Listen to the teacher and write down- Make questions in pairs

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

263

Page 264: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngtheir answers- Corrects mistakesExercise 1: (8 minutes)- Asks students to do Exercise 1- Introduce how to do it- Lets them work individually then compare with partner - Walks round, checks and gives feedbackExercise 2 (8 minutes)- Introduces Exercise 2 to students and explain how to do it- Asks students to put the verbs into the right column “transitive or intransitive verbs”- Asks students to do it in pairs- Checks the answers and asks students to make sentences with those verbs- Corrects mistakes* Remarks:- Most transitive verbs can be used in the passive- Intransitive verbs can never be used in passiveExercise 3: (10 minutes)- Introduces Exercise 3 to students and explain how to do it- Asks students to do it- Lets them work in groups to find sentences that have transitive verbs, then turn them into passive- Walks round and help them- Checks, corrects mistakes

- Do individually then in pairsKey:Intransitive verbs: sleep, lie, occur, arrive, rain, exist

- Do the task in pairs

- Make sentences:1. I help my friend to do homework.2. My father has grown many kinds of flowers. .....................

- Listen to the teacher and copy down

- Listen to the teacher- Do the task in groupsKey:1. The bill will be paid by An.3. Towels are supplied by the hotel.5. My mistakes were noticed by everyone.7. I wasn’t surprised

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

264

Page 265: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Homework : (2 minutes)- Asks students to do Part Language Focus and prepare the next lesson

by the news.9. The story was told by an old man.

- Listen to the teacher and write down

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

265

Page 266: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 77 th period Date : 02/ 3/ 2009Grade 12 Theme: Correct the test

I. Objectives: After this correction students will be clearer about the test they have just done. And have to know how to try their best for the next test.II. Method: Integrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: board, the test paper, key for the testIV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Greeting- Ask students some questions on the previous test- Tell the aim of the period: correct the test

A. PRONUNCIATION: (1.25points ) (5 minutes)- Repeat the questions- Get students to read the passage again carefully- Call some students to read out their answers, and the others give remarks if it is correct or not.- Finally read the keys out

- Greeting- Listen and understand the task- Get ready for the lesson

- Look at their paper- Compare the resutls with the others- Get the correct answers from the

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

266

Page 267: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngaloudB. VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR:

(6.25points) (15 minutes) - Repeat the questions- Get student to read the test again carefully- Call some students to read out their answers, and the others give remarks if it is correct or not- Finally read the keys out aloudC. ERROR IDENTIFICATION : ( 1.25 points) : (5 minutes) - Repeat the questions- Show the passage again several times- Get students toread the passage again carefully- Call some students to write their answers on the board, and the others give remarks if it is correct or not- Finally read the keys out aloudD. Make the correct choice to complete each sentence: (1.25 points) (10 minutes )- Repeat the questions- Get student to read the test again carefully- Call some students to read out their answers, and the others give remarks if it is correct or not- Finally read the keys out aloud

Homework: (5 minutes)

keys

- Look at their paper- Compare the results with the others- Get the correct answers from the keys

- Look at the writing again and compare it with the others- Correct the wrong sentences base on the key

- Look at their paper- Compare the results with the others- Get the correct answers from the keys

- Prepare Unit 13:

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

267

Page 268: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngAsk students to prepare Unit 13 The 22nd Sea Games at home

The 22nd Sea Games at home

Unit 13: The 22nd Sea GamesThe 78 th period Date : 06/ 3/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: The 22nd Sea GamesUnit 13Reading

Time: 45

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: By the end of this lesson, students will be

able to:- Scan for specific information- Give vietnamese equivalents to words and

phrases- Answer the questions

2. Knowledge:

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

268

Page 269: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- General knowledge: Students can understand the 22nd Sea

Games- Language: Giving Vietnamse equivalents to words and phrases- New words: Words related to Sea Games3. Skills: - Scanning for specific information

- Passage comprehensionII. Method: Integrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: textbooks, some pictures of Sea GamesIV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Lets students to listen to a song “V× mét thÕ giíi ngµy mai” and tell what song it is- Asks some questions:1. In what event was it first sung?2. When and where was this event held?- Leads in new lesson: The 22nd

Sea Games Pre-reading: (5 minutes)- Asks students to work in pairs to look at picture and answer the questions1. Where event was it?2. Where do you think the event took place?- Goes round to listen to students- Calls some pairs to answer- Leads in new lesson

While-reading : (25 minutes)- Asks students to open the books and read the passage

- Listen to the song and answer questions

1. The 22nd Sea Games2. In Vietnam – in 2003

- Look at picture and answer the question1. In 20032. In Ha Noi

- Listen to the teacher

- Read individually

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

269

Page 270: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngsilently - Lets students do task 1 Task 1 : - Asks students to do the task invidually then compare answers with partner- Asks students try to guess meanings through the passage or look up dictionary- Checks answers with the whole class and gives feedback

Task 2: - Asks students to scan the passage and find information to complete the sentences- Asks students to do individually first then compare with partner- Goes round to give help- Checks answers and give feedback- Calls some students to read loudly completed sentences

Task 3: - Asks students to find answers for all questions in the passage in pairs- Goes round to provide help- Calls some students to present their answers in front of the class - Listens to the students and corrects mistakes- Calls on some students to write answers on the board- Corrects mistakes again

- Do the task independentlyKey:1. ngêi say mª thÓ thao2. ®oµn kÕt3. danh hiÖu4. thÓ dôc thÓ h×nh5. tinh thÇn cao6. ®ång bµo

- Read individually then compare their answers with partnersKey:1. the 5th to 13th

December, 20032. 90 golds3. the Swimming and Shooting Events4. some point in the future

- Work in pairs to answer the question- Listen to their friends and the teacher- Correct answersKey:1. It was solidarity, co-operation for peace and development.2. 444 gold medals were won at the Sea Games.3. The Vietnamese Women’s Football

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

270

Page 271: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

After you read : (8 minutes)- Asks students to work in groups and talk about names of some of the Vietnamese athletes they love and say what they are famous for, and what aspects of sportsmanship they admire - Goes round to help students- Calls some students to present in front of the class- Listens to students and correct mistakes, gives marks

Home work: (2 minutes)- Asks students to write a paragraph about their beloved athletes (about 100 words)- Asks students to prepare part B. Speaking at home

team successfully defended the Sea Games title.4. The Thai Men’s Football team won the gold medal.5. It was because firstly, to prepare for the 22nd Sea Games, Vietnam carried out an intensive programme for its athletes, which included training in facilities, both home and abroad; secondly, with the strong support of their countrymen, the Vietnamese athletes competed in high spirits.

- Work in groups

- Do the task

- Some students to practise talking- Listen to their friends’ talking and give comment

- Listen to the teacher and write down

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

271

Page 272: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 79 th Period Date: 09/ 3/ 2009 Grade 12

Theme: The 22nd Sea GamesUnit 13SpeakingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: By the end of this lesson, students will be

able to be expected to report some of the records at the 22nd SEA Games the sports results of the match.After that, they can use it in the real life.

2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Students can understand some of the

records at the 22nd Sea Games- Language: asking and answering about records at the 22nd

SEA Games- New words: words related to some sports at the 22nd SEA Games3. Skills: - Talking about sports events of the 22nd SEA Games

- Talking about (reporting) sports resultsII. Method: integrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: pictures, textbooksIV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesPre- speaking: (10 minutes)- Divides the class into 2 groups: each group names of the sport under each symbol. The group gives more names will be the winner

- Listen to the teacher- Work in groups

- Observe the board Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

272

Page 273: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Goes round to provide help and listen to students- Calls 2 groups to present their results on the board- Corrects pronunciation and mistakes- Declares the winner

While-speaking : (20 minutes)Task 1- Asks students to look at symbols and names of sports- Calls some students to speak- Corrects pronunciation and gives answers

Task 2- Asks students to look at the books and talk about some of the records at the 22nd SEA Games, using the information in the table- Asks students to pronouce some words (names of athletes and sports)- Lets students work in pairs- Goes round to check their activities- Calls some students to practise speaking

- Listen to the teacher and copy down names of sports

- Look at pictures and try to remember- Correct pronunciation themselves1. football (soccer)2. tennis3. swimming4. cycling5. basketball6. (running) athletics

- Look at the book

- Work independently

- Practise speaking with the teacher- Work in pairs- Listen to their friends A: Hi Lam. What are you doing?B: Well, I’m searching for sport records at the 22nd

SEA Games.A: It’s great. Could

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

273

Page 274: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Post-speaking : (13 minutes)Task 3- Asks students to work in small groups to make a report on the sports results, using information in the scoreboard- Goes round to provide help- Calls some students to speak loudly in front of the class- Corrects pronunciation and gives comments- Gives marks

Homework: (2 minutes)- Ask students to prepare Part C- Listening and do homework

you tell me about the record of the Men’s 200 meters?B: A man coming from Thailand won the game.A: What’s his name?B: He’s Boonthung.A: What was his record?B: He ran 200 meters in 20,14 seconds.A: Wow! How exellent he was! He ran very fast.

- Work in groupsSuggestions:- Thailand and Malysia played in the Women’s Football Third-Place Playoff. The Thai team won the bronze medal. The results (score) was 6-1.- Thailand and Vietnam played in the Men’s Football Final. The Thai team won the gold medal. The score was 2-1.- Thailand and Vietnam played in the Women’s Volleyball Final. The

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

274

Page 275: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Thai team won the gold medal. The score was 3-0.

- Listen to the teacher- Write down the homework

The 80 th period Date: 11/ 3/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: The 22nd SEA GamesUnit 13ListeningTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

275

Page 276: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng1. Educational aim: By the end of this lesson, students will

know more about the athletes’ records in the 22nd Southeast Asian Games as well as their jobs when the Games are over

2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Students learn more about records in the

22nd SEA Games and pole vaulting- New words: Words related to pole vaulting3. Skills: - Listening and answering comprehension questions - Listening and deciding on True or False statementsII. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Student’s bookIV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesPre-listening: (8 minutes)- Asks to work in pairs to look at the picture and answer the question- Goes round to listen to students- Calls some pairs to speak out- Corrects pronunciation- Asks some questions to pre-teach new words:1. When some body has won the medal, where does he stand to get the prize? 2. tempting (adj) = attractive - Lets students read loudly some new words- Calls some students to repeat- Corrects pronunciation

While-listening: (20 minutes)Task 1- Says: “You will hear a newspaper article about Amnat, the winner in the 22nd

- Work in pairs to answer the questions

- Listen to their friends

1. The podium- Listen to the teacher and write down

- Read in chorus

- Correct their pronunciation themselves

- Read questions Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

276

Page 277: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngSEA Games Pole Vaulting competition. Listen to the tape and answer the questions”- Asks students read questions first to understand the contents- Plays the tape the 1st time, reminds students to new words:+ clear (v): nh¶y qua+ break (v): ph¸ kØ lôc- Plays the tape 2nd time and asks students only give short answers- Calls some students to answer- Calls 4 students to write answers on the board- Corrects mistakes and gives correct answersTask 2- Asks students to listen to the 2nd newspaper article about the players of Vietnam’s Women’s Football team and decide whether the statements are T or F- Plays the tapes 2 times - Checks answers and asks students to give their evidences- Corrects the answers

After-listening: (15 minutes)- Asks students to work in groups to discuss the question: Which Vietnamese footballer(s) do you like best? Why?

first

- Listen to the tape carefully and then do the task- Give answers:1. one2. Thailand3. 4,8m4. No, he didn’t.

- Read the statements first- Listen to the tapeKey:1. 1. T2. F3. T4. T5. F

- Work in groups to practise- Listen to their friends and correct mistakesSuggestion:Goal keeper: Dang Kieu Trinh- Football players: Do Hong Tien, Le Thi Oanh ect.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

277

Page 278: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Goes round to provide help- Calls some groups to present- Gives comments

Homework: (2 minutes)- Remember them to prepare Part- Writing at home

- Listen to the teacher and write down

The 81 st period Date: 13/ 3/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: The 22nd SEA GamesUnit 13WritingTime 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: By the end of this lesson, students will be

able to describe a Sporting event (a football match)

2. General knowledge: Students learn how to write describing a football match

- Language: - New words: Words related to football3. Skills: Describing a sporting event (a football match)II. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Student’s book, notebookIV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesPre-writing: (5 minutes)Task 1:- Says: “You are going to write a description of a football match between your school’s team and one of your neighbouring schools’ teams. The following are the questions you have to answer when describing the

- Listen to the teacher and work in pairsSuggestions:+ Introduction:1. Why was the football match held?2. What teams took

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

278

Page 279: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngmatch, but they are jumbled. You should work with a partner and put the questions in the suitable sections”- Suggests students order the sentences with 3 parts: Introduction- Details of the match- Conclusion- Walks round to help- Calls some students to give answers

While-writing: (18 minutes)Task 2- Asks students to read all questions again and answer them- Has students read Useful Languge to improve their answers- Gives some suggestions to students:Nouns: players/ captain/ defender/ stricker/ goal keeper/ refereeVerbs: infringe/ dribble/ pass the ball ect.- Calls some students to answer- Corrects mistakes- Asks students write answers in notebooks

part in the match?3. When and where did the match take place?+ Details of the match:1. What was the weather like on that day?2. How did each team play in the first half?/ second half?3. What was the spectators’ attitude?4. Which team played better?5. Who scored a goal?+ Conclusion:1. What was the result?2. What did you think about the game?

- Read the questions- Work in pairs

- Listen to the teacher and copy down

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

279

Page 280: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngPost-writing: (20 minutes)Task 3- Asks students to write a description of the football match mentioned above by using suggested above words- Asks students to work individually- Goes round to provide help- Calls some students to read loudly their writing- Corrects mistakes and gives marks

Homework: (2 minutes)- Ask students to do part writing of Unit 1 in the student’s work book and preapare part Language Focus

- Look at the picture and do the task

- Do independently- Listen to their friends and correct mistakes

- Listen to the teacher and write down homework

The 82 nd period Date: 15/ 3/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: The 22nd SEA GamesUnit 13Language FocusTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: By the end of this lesson, students will be

able to:- practise linking- review and practise: Double comparison

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

280

Page 281: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Students learn how to use linking and

review comparison- Language: - Linking

- Comparison- New words: Words related to linking and comparison3. Skills: Pronoucing linking II. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Student’s bookIV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesPronunciation: (8 minutes)- Ask students to look at these sentences and give comments on those sentences- Has students to pay attention on linking: the last consonant of 1st word with a vowel of following wordEx: look-at, quite-old...*Listen and repeat : - Read loudly then ask students to repeat- Calls some students to read again- Correct pronunciation for the students

Grammar : (25 minutes)- Introduce exercises to the students

Exercise 1: - Asks students to do Exercise 1- Introduce how to do it- Lets them work in pairs to do matching with the instruction:

- Look at the books

- Listen to the teacher

- Listen to the tape and practise speaking

- Listen to the teacher

- Work in pairs and do the taskKey:2.e- 3.a- 4.b- 5. d- 6.g- 7.f

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

281

Page 282: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngcomparative + and + comparative- Walks round, checks and gives feedback

Exercise 2 - Introduces Exercise 2 to students and explain how to do it- Asks students to work individually and complete the sentences using comparative structure: comparative + and + comparative- Reminds students to remember short- adjectives and long adjectives comparison- Calls some students to give their answers- Corrects the answers

Exercise 3: (10 minutes)- Introduces Exercise 3 to students and explain how to do it- Asks students to do complete the sentences, using the structure “the + comparative, the + comparative”- Asks students to do the task individually first then compare with partners- Goes round to observe - Calls some students to present their answers

- Listen to the teacher and copy down Key:1. shorter and shorter2. more and more expensive3. worse and worse4. more and more complicated5. better and better6. more and more active7. more and more difficult8. closer and closer

- Listen to the teacher

- Do the task individually first then in pairsKey:1. The warmer the weather, the better I feel.2. The more you practise your English, the faster you will learn.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

282

Page 283: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Corrects mistakes and gives feedbacks

Homework : (2 minutes)- Asks students to do Part Language Focus and prepare Test yourself F.- Asks students to make some sentences with the comparative structures they’ve reviewed

3. The longer he waited, the more impatient he became.4. The more electricity you use, the higher your bill will be.5. The more expensive the hotel, the better the service.6. The more I got to know him, the more I liked him.7. The more you have, the more you want.

- Listen to the teacher and write down

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

283

Page 284: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 83 rd period Date : 17/ 03/ 2009Grade 12 Test yourself E

I. Objectives: After this lesson, students will be able to:- Check themselves their skills in reading, speaking,

listening, writing.- Improve their knowledge through the test yourself.

II. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative.II. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, cassetteplayer, board, hand-outs…IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Greeting- Ask students something about the test yourself E* Have you prepared it at home?* Have you got any difficulties?

Test yourself

I. Listening(2.5 points) (10 minutes)- Present the task: Listen and complete the table below

- Greeting- Answer teacher’s questions

- Look at the book and listen to the task- understand the

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

284

Page 285: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Tell students the topic of the table- Get students to look through the table- Explain the meaning of new words- After that turn on the tape of the passage aloud twice- Let students fill in the blanks with the words they have just heard- Go round the class to control the work- Then turn on the tape of the passage the last time for students to check their results- Correct mistakesII. Reading (2.5 points) (10 minutes)- Present the task: Read the passgae and decide which type of sport (A- F).- Get students to work in groups, discuss about the passage- Go round the class to control the discussion- State the best option- Correct mistakes

III. Grammar(2.5 points) (8 minutes)- Recall the grammar of articals.- Giude students how to do- Give them some newwords:

task- Listen to the tape carefully- Fill in the blanks with the words they’ve just heard- Correct mistakes

Keys:1. illustration, 2. preserve, 3. bamboo, 4. 868, 5. knowlege.

- Look at the textbook and listen to the teacher then read the passage and decide which type of sport (A- F).- Work in groups to discuss about the passage- Finish the task- Compare their results with the other groups, and correct.Keys:1. B, 2. D, 3. A, 4. C, 5. F.

- Listen to the teacher- Work in groups to complete the sentences- Compare the results with the other groups- Correct mistakes

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

285

Page 286: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Do the first as an example.- Ask students to to the exercise.- Call the to to on board.- Go round the class to control the set’s activities- State the keys- Correct mistakes

IV. Writing(2.5 points) (7 minutes)- Giude students how to write- Give students some models and structures to writes..- Ask students to write.- Call the to to on board.- Go round the class to control the students’ activities- Correct mistakes

Homework (5 minutes)- Ask students: + to study all the lessons again + to prepare Unit 14 – Reading.

Keys:1. I - T, 2. T - I, 3. T - I, 4. I - T, 5. T - I , 6. I - T,7. I - T, 8. I - T, 9. I - T, 10. T - I.

- Listen to the teacher carefully.- Work in groups or in pairs then write.- Compare the results with the other groups.

- Correct mistakes

- Study all the lessons again and prepare Unit 14 – Reading.

Unit 14 : INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONSThe 84 th period Date : 19/3/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: International OrganizationsUnit 14Reading

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

286

Page 287: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Time: 45 minutesI. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students should know about International

Red Cross 2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: Students know about activities of

International Red Cross- Language: Students could understand and use new words after reading- New words: Words related to International Red Cross3. Skills: Guessing meaning in context, scanning for specific

information and passage comprehensionII. Method: Integrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Student’s book and pictures, etc.IV. Procedure:Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Lead out the hand out and ask students matching the names of organizations with the pictures - Let students understand more about these organizations, today we learn Unit 14- part A: Reading

Before you read : (7 minutes)- Ask students to use the suggestion in their books to work in pairs- Ask and answer questions :1,what kind of activities is this organization involved in?2,Is there a national Red Cross Society in Vietnam?- Listen to students and correct pronunciation and grammar if necessaryWhile you read : (23

- Open the book- Listen to the teacher - Look at the blackboard and put two words together- Listen to the teacher and open the book – Unit 14, part A: reading

- Look at the book, listen to the teacher and work in pairs:-Answer the questions1,giving medical aids-taking care of victims of poverty2,Yes

- Listen to the teacher then read the

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

287

Page 288: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngminutes)- Ask students to look through the passage and read in silence- Help students read the passage- Explain pronunciation and meaning of new words which appear in the passageTask 1 : (3 minutes)- Ask students to choose the best words in the box to complete the following sentences- Let students work individual or in groups- Help students if necessaryKeys: 1,dedicated 2,appealed 3,initiated4,appalled 5,resultedTask 2: (4 minutes)-Ask students go through the reading text and decide whether the statements are true or false-Walk round the classroom and correct mistakes-Keys: 1. T, 2. T, 3. T ,4. F, 5. T.Task 3: (6 minutes)- Ask students to answer the following questions- Ask students look through the passages then try to answer the questions in right way- Let them work in pairs- Help students if necessary(the answers in the passage)- Walk round the classroom

passages - Ask some new words if necessary

- Keep the book open- Listen to the teacher then do task 1- Ask the teacher if necessary- work individual or in group- Write down in the notebook

- Listen to the teacher-work individually and then work in pair and compare

- Try to answer the questions- Practice with a partner then write them down in the note books- Ask the teacher if necessary

- Listen to the teacher -Work in pairs- The students who are called to stand up

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

288

Page 289: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngand correct mistakesAfter you read : (8 minutes)- Ask students to read the passage again and fill a suitable word for the following paragraph- Listen to students and correct mistakes -Keys:1,appalled,2,lack .3,of,4.inHome work: (2 minutes)- Ask students to write a short passage about the role of the Red Cross society in your country (80 words)- Prepare Part B : Speaking at home

to talk loudly are intelligent ones

- Listen to the teacher and write down homework

The 85 th Period Date 21/ 3/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: International OrganizationsUnit 14SpeakingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students could ask and answer about international organizations in the world2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: By the end of the lesson students can practise a dialogue about some international organizations - Language: asking for and giving information from a passage- New words: words related to the topic3. Skills: talking about international organizations and their activities in charity and volunteer workII. Method: integrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: pictures ,textbook,....IV. Procedure: Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

289

Page 290: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Ask students to keep book close- Ask students to look at the logos and match them with the organizations they stand for- Check in front of the class- Tell students to understand more about international organizations(We learn Unit 14, part- speaking)Pre-speaking : (12 minutes)Task 1- Ask students to read the passage and answer the questions about WHO

- Let them work in pairs- Listen to students and correct mistakes

While-speaking : (15 minutes)Task 2- Ask students to talk about the information about UNICEF and WWF

- Keep books close- Listen to the teacher- Look at the board and try to remember name and logo of each organization

- Look at student’s book- Listen to the teacher andanswer -Keys:1,WHO stands for World Health Organization2,It was established on 7 April 19483,Its major objective is the attainment by all peoples of the highest possible level of health4,Its major activities are carrying out research on medical development and improving international health care

-Work in pairs and Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

290

Page 291: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Let them work in groups- Walk round and help them- Ask some students to stand up to talk again loudly- Listen and correct mistakes

Post-speaking : (10 minutes)Task 3- Ask students to tell the classmates what you know about one international organization mentioned above- Walk round and help them- Let them work in groups- Ask some students to stand up and tell loudly- Listen and correct mistakes

Homework: (3 minutes)- Ask students to write a passage about UNICEF or WWF (80 words)- Ask students to prepare Part C- Listening and do homework

ask and answer A :I’m searching some information about UNICEF .Could you tell me some?B :Well,UNICEF stands for the United Nations International Children’s Emergency FundA :When was it founded:B :In 1948 in New York................

- Listen to the teacher- Do task 3- Work in groups- The students are called stand up and tell loudlyThe United Nations International Children’s Emergency Fund, which was founded in1948 ,is eh United Nations funds for children .Its headquarters are in New York ,USA,.........- Listen to the teacher- Write down the homework

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

291

Page 292: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngThe 86 th period Date : 23/ 3/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: International OrganizationsUnit 14ListeningTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students should listen and give

information about United Nations Organization

2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Students learn more about United Nations- New words: Words related to United Nations3. Skills: - Listening and comprehension questions - Listening and deciding on True or False statements or no informationII. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Student’s book, pictures IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Ask students to close the books- Give some pictures and answer some questions1,Who are they?2 ,What are their job ?- Check some students and mark- If you want to know more details about UN organization we will go to Unit 14- part ListeningPre-listening: (7 minutes)- Ask students to look at the part: Before listening-Ask students to answer the

- Close the books- Listen to the teacher- Work in groups and look at the picture and answer

- Listen to the teacher and open textbooks

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

292

Page 293: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngquestionWhat do you know about the organization in the picture?- Let them work in pairs and make questions- Walk round, listen and help students- Read loudly the words:Destruction, organization, independence, international...- Ask students to repeat loudly the words- Listen and check pronunciationWhile-listening: (20 minutes)Task 1- Ask students to listen to the first part of the passage and circle the best answer to the following questions- Let them read through these sentences- Read loudly or turn on the typescript three times- Help them if necessaryTask 2- Ask students to look through the sentences in task 2- Ask students to listen to the tapescript again and fill in the missing words-let students compare their answers with the partners’ answers- Ask students to give reasons for their answersKey: 1.solve international problems2,the UN 3,in its goals 4,at

- Look at the books- Listen to the teacher - Work in pairs

- Repeat loudly the words and try to remember them

- Keep book open- Listen carefully and choose the best answerKey: 1C.2D.3C

- Keep book open and listen to the teacher- Read the sentences in task 2 and try to understand them- Listen to the typescript again and fill in the missing words

-Discuss and find Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

293

Page 294: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngwar 5.independeceAfter-listening: (10 minutes)- Ask students to open the books- Ask them to list as many as possible the names of the international organizations you have known so far- Let them work in pairs- Walk round and help students

- Ask some students to stand up and go to board and write the names of the international organizations - Listen and correct mistakesHomework: (3 minutes)- Ask students to write a passage about UN- Remember them to prepare Part- Writing at home

out the names of international organizations they have known- The students who are called go to board and write down your answer

-Listen to the teacher and write down homework

The 87 th period Date: 25/ 3/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: International OrganizationsUnit 14WritingTime 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students should write a short description of an international organization2. General knowledge: Students learn how to write a

description , stages of a description- Language: - New words: Words related to the topic3. Skills: Writing a narrativeII. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicative Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

294

Page 295: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngIII. Teaching aids: Student’s book, notebook, some picturesIV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Ask students to keep book close- Ask students put the words into correct columns then say what organization the y belong to ?- Check and explain them to the class:Pre-writing: (10 minutes)- Ask student to work in groups and go through the list of suggestions above.Tell your friend the reason why you would like to work for WHO or WWF.- Explain some new words- Let them work in groups- Walk around, check and help students- Explain to student to some questions using their opinionWhile-writing: (18 minutes)Task 2- Ask students to do task 2-Ask students to use the ideas you have discusses above to write a paraghaph about the reasons you choose to work for one of the above international organizationsBegin as followed “I’d like to work for....”- Let them work in groups- Go round, check and help students

- Keep book close- Listen to the teacher and work in pairs

- Listen to the teacherand open the books

- Read the task1- Ask the teacher if necessary

- Listen to the teacher- Do task 2 in groups

- Some students Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

295

Page 296: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngPost-writing: (10 minutes)- Give suggestions and corrections- Ask students to read another’s description- Ask some students to read loudly their description

- Correct mistakes and mark

Homework: (2 minutes)- Ask students to do part writing of Unit 14 in the student’s work book and prepare part Language Focus

read loudly their products in front of the classEveryone has his or her own choice .To me, supposed I was offered to work for one of the international organizations, I’d like to work for WHO for a number of reasons .First, if I work for WHO ,I will have an opportunity to live...

- Listen to the teacher and write down homework

The 88 th period Date: 27/ 3/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: International Organizations Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

296

Page 297: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Unit 14Language FocusTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students should practice the falling tune

and use phrasal verbs2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Students learn how to use phrasal verbs

- Language: Using the phrasal verbs- New words: Words related to topic3. Skills: Intonation and phrasal verbsII. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Student’s book, pictures IV. Procedure:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesPronunciation: (8 minutes)- Ask students to look at their books then introduce to them* Practise these sentences- Read the sentences loudly- Ask students to repeat-Explain some cases to fall tune :narrative sentences; imperative ;Wh-questions- Correct pronunciation for students

Grammar and vocabulary:(4 minutes)- Introduce exercises to the students- Let students get their attention to focus on phrasal verbsPhrasal verbs :verbs +prepositionPhrasal verbs are used as transitive verbs

- Listen to the teacher- Open the books- Look at Practise the sentences- Listen to the teacher then repeat in chorus then individual- Listen to the teacher

- Listen to the teacher and give some examples

-Examples: call for, come cross, get over, take after...

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

297

Page 298: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng-Ask students give some examples related to phrasal verbs

Exercise 1: (8 minutes)- Ask students to do Exercise 1- Introduce how to do it- Let them work in pairs - Walk round, check and give mark

Exercise 2 (8 minutes)- Introduce Exercise 2 to students and explain how to do it- Ask students to do it- Let them work individually- Check, correct mistakes

Exercise 3: (10 minutes)- Introduce Exercise 3 to students and explain how to do it- Ask students to do it- Let them work individually- Walk round and help them- Check, correct mistakes, give reasons and mark

Homework : (2 minutes)Ask students to do Part Language Focus and prepare to do the test 45 minutes

-Do the excercise1-work individually and work in pair-Keys:1. give up, 2. fill in, 3. turn on, 4. take of, 5. wash up, 6. look up 7. turn off, 8. fill in/put on 9. go on.

- Listen to the teacher and do exercise 2-Keys: 1. in, 2. up, 3.out, 4. round, 5. on, 6. up, 7. down, 8. away, 9.down, 10. on.

- Listen to the teacher and do exercise 3Key: 1. turns up, 2. look after,3. takes after, 4. got over,5. held up, 6. try out,7. went off.

- Listen to the teacher and write down

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

298

Page 299: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 89 th period Date : 29/ 3/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: test 45 minutes

Full name……………….Class 12………………. TEST 45’I/ Pick out the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently.1. a. taste b. tie c. crest d. digestion2. a. scuba- diving b. hummock c. fund d. punishment3. a. enact b. eject c. penalty d. expeditionII/ Pick out the word that has the stress differently from that of the other words.4. a. bamboo b. leopard c. panda d. parrot5. a. fascinating b. biology c. priority d. endangermentIII/ Choose the best answer.6. If the phone rings, it ……….be for me. a. can b. will c. would d. shall7. Although he tried he ……..not make it. a. would b. should c. might d. could8. I prefer scuba- diving………………………. a. to windsurf b. than windsurf c. to windsurfing d. than windsurfing Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

299

Page 300: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng9. Mary, you are ………….to take part in the game. a. supposed b. supported c. exposed d. indicated10. Neither Mary nor her sister………….to join the water polo. a. go b. are going c have gone d. is going11. Tell me ………..you want, and I’ll try to get it for you. a. that do b. what do c. that if d. what12. When people are driving, they ………..keep their eyes on the road. a. wouldn’t b. should c. would d. shouldn’t13. What’s the name of the man………..car you borrowed? a. who b. which c. that d. whose14.Anyone…………….must pay before next Friday. a. who are interested in the job b. who are interesting in the job c. who is interested in the job d. whose job is interested15. “ would you like to come on a picnic with us?” He….us to come on a picnic with them. a. advised b. ordered c. invited d. begged16. My bicycle …………last night. a. was stolen b. stolen c. was stealing d. stole17. I can’t find my books. I………..it in the restaurant last night. a. must have left b. had left c. left d. might leave18. I wish everything ………..so expensive. a. would be b. wouldn’t be c. won’t be d. could be19. We should plant trees along the streets to …………. Our city. a. beautiful b. beautifully c. beautify d. beauty20. We had an ………..trip to Nam’s native village last Sunday. a. enjoyed b. enjoyable c. enjoying d. enjoyment21. Life in the countryside is very…………., isn’t it? a. peace b. peaceful c. peacefully d. peacefulness22. You can select what you want; it’s your………. a. choose b. chose c. chosen d. choice23.The telephone went………., everyone wake up at one. a. in b. on c. off d. with24. I was born in New York but I grew………….in England. a. at b. up c. about d. of Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

300

Page 301: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng25. He ran too quickly so I can’t catch up ……….him. a. off b. on c. with d. after 26.I wish you can see and hear all sort of people speaking here. A B C D27. The man told me don’t wander alone in the streets at night. A B C D28. Would you give up playing football if you break you leg? A B C D29. This is the place which I was born and grew up. A B C D30. I spoke very slowly in order the man could understand what I said. A B C DIV/ Read the passage and choose the best answer. The World Trade Organization ( WTO) , founded on January 1, 1995, aims to encourage international trade to flow as freely as possible., making sure that trade agreements are respected and that any disputes can be settled. In the five years since it founding, the WTO has become well- known as one of the world’s most powerful economic organizations, taking its place alongside the World Bank and International Monetary Fund. The system of globe rules for international trade, however, dates back haft a century to 1948 when the General Agreements on Tariffs and Trade ( GATT) was founded after World War II. As time went by, it became clear that the GATT had two major drawbacks the limited areas of trade it covered, and lack of an effective system to settle disputes. After seven years of trade talks ending in 1994, the so-called Uruguay Round finally gave birth to the WTO, complete with effective system to settle disputes and to form new rules covering trade in services and intellectual property. Even after seven years of talks and with 22,500 pages of agreements reached, problems remained, especially in the difficult –to-deal-with areas of agriculture and services.31. What is the purpose of the WTO? a. to encourage international trade to flow freely. b. to make sure that trade agreements are respected. c. to settle any disputes. d. all of the above. Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

301

Page 302: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng32. The writer think that the WTO has become. a. more powerful than any other economic organizations. b. the world’s most powerful economic organizations. c. one of the world’s powerful economic organizations. d. less powerful than World Bank and International Monetary Fund.33. According to the passage, the GATT stopped working. A. in 1948 b. in 1994 c. after World War end d. during the seven years of the Uruguay round talk34. The word “ it “ in bold refers to……………. a. the WTO c.. The GATT b. the World Bank d. the International Monetary Fund35. The word “ went by” could best placed by……………. a. flew b. flowed c. passed d. pastV/ Complete the passage, using the correct words. Many kinds of animals are endangered by human beings. The United State government list of endangered species (1)……….alligators, tigers, grizzly bears, some kinds of whales. And over three dozen species of butterflies. What has(2)………..to the scarcity of these animals, which many become extinct(3)………. Vital protection? One important factor is that (4)………animals have been widely hunted and killed for food or for their beautiful skins. (5)…………accordance with the Endangered Species Act , it is illegal in the United State to hunt, sell, or to collect endangered species.36. a. includes b. consist c. comprise d. cover37. a. gone b. brought c. led d. given38. a. with b. without c. beyond d. out of39. a. few b. much c. many d. a lot40. a. on b. with c. from d. in

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

302

Page 303: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Unit 15: WOMEN IN SOCIETYThe 90 th period Date : 30/ 3/ 2008Grade 12

Theme: Women SocietyUnit 15ReadingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: - Students read passage comprehension about role of women in society- Students know how to use the new words through asking and answering2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: - Through this unit, students know the role of women in society

- New words: Words related to the topic( society, women....)3. Skills: -Guessing meaning from context

-Summarizing main idea -Passage comprehension

II. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Real objects, pictures, English textbook 12, hand-outsIV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (4 minutes)- Ask students to list out the jobs that men and women often do in one minute-Let students work in pairs-Ask students questionsDid women do these jobs in the old days? why?

- Listen to the teacher and list the jobs that men and women do

- Answer the question

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

303

Page 304: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

_Lead in: Today, we’ll study a new lesson Unit 15- part A :ReadingPre-reading: (7 minutes)-ask students kook at the pictures and say what kind of work is mentioned in each picture and answer the questions that follow- Let students sit in pairs or in groups and put the four most suitable places from the box under each heading- Give suggestions- Walk round the class and offers ideas and comments when students need help- Conduct the correction and give the meaning of some words

While-reading: (20 minutes)- Make the class read the small talks, to scan the details and do the tasksTask 1 : Read through the context and give the Vietnamese equivalents to the following words and phrases.- Firsly, ask students to study individually then in pairs- Walks around the class, offer ideas and comments when students need help- Give suggestions

Task 2- Work in pairs, read the small talks again and choose the

- Do the tasks- Give answers-The answer is various

- Do the tasks- Give answers1,nÒn v¨n minh nh©n lo¹i2,sinh con 3,sù tham gia4,thêi kú khai s¸ng5,nh÷ng niÒm tin ¨n s©u vµo tiÒm thøc6,viÖc ch¨m sãc gia ®×nh7,n¨ng lùc trÝ tuÖ8, c¬ héi viÖc lµm

- Read all questions- Read the small talks again to scan information- Work in pairs

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

304

Page 305: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

best option to answer the following questions- Introduce the aim of Task 2- Ask students to read the small talks again to find the suitable choice- Ask students to work individually then work in pairs- Walk round the class and comments when students needTask 3 : Read through the context and decide which of the headings below suit for paragraphA .Women’s Intellectual AbilityB .The Age of EnlightenmentC . women’s RightsD . Women’s Role in education- Ask students to read the small talks again to choose the best title for the passage- Ask students to work with a partner- Walks arround the class to help students whenever they need

Post-reading: (12 minutes)- Let students work in groups to summarise the reading passage by writing One sentence for each paragraph

- Has students work in groups and answer the questions- Walk around the class, listen to student’s discussions and offer suggestions when necessary

- Give answers1C 2D 3C 4B 5A

- Work in groupsKey: C -

- Have discussion then present ideas in front of the class- Present the content of the small talks again- Keys:Paraghraph1 :women in the old societiesParaghraph2 :The struggle for women’s rightsParaghraph3:the statue of women in society todays

-Listen to the teacher and take

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

305

Page 306: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

- Give comments- Ask students to tell the content of the small talks- Ask to tell themselves

Homework : (2 minutes)-Do reading text in workbook-Prepare the next lesson

note

The 91 st period Date: 01/ 4/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: Women SocietyUnit 15SpeakingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students know how to express opinions and express degrees of agreement2. Knowledge: Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

306

Page 307: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- General knowledge: - Through this unit, students can make

opinions with a partner easily- Know how to arrange opinions sensibly- Language: Students use sentences, words, phrases and

expressions for making degrees of agreement3. Skills: Fluency in expressing opinion and expressions for

making a opinionII. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Pictures, English textbook 12, hand-outsIV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Student’s activities NotesWarm-up:(5minutes)

- Give a picture with a situation and ask students to guess what happens next?

- Ask students work in pairs

Today, we will practice giving the opinion-for or againstPre-reading: (8 minutes)Task 1: These expressions are commonly used when people are expressed the agreement or disagreement . Place them under the appropriate heading then practise with a partner- Give instruction- Introduce some expressions that we can use to agree and disagree about something

- Ask student to work individually then work in groupsTask 2:

- Listen to the teache

- Do the task

-Work in pairs and practise saying aloud

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

307

Page 308: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng-Read and respond to these statements ,using useful expression in task 1 and then practise it with a partner

- Ask students to work individually then in pairs- Walk around the class to help student when necessary- Check and give suggestions- Ask student to practise it with a partner- Corrects students’ pronunciation if necessary

Post-reading: (14 minutes)- Work in group to discuss

whether you agree or disagree with the statement “ Married women should not to go to work”

Make small talks on the following topics, using the starting and ending of a conversation- Divide the class into 4 groups- Ask each group to discuss one topic and make a small conversation- Walk around the class and help all students when

- Do the task

- Practise with partnersA :Men are usually stronger than womenI think so .(That’s the reason why men often do hard work ,such as building ,carrying things...)B : Women are usually more sympathetic than menI don’t think so because there are fathers who are gentle and understand their children better than theirs wives....

- Work in groups- Practise the conversationAnswer:

- A: Hi,what do you think about the statement “Married women should not to go to work”

?B: Hi, .I don’t agree

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

308

Page 309: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngnecessary- Ask students to present the conversations

- - Give comments

- Homework:(2minutes)- In not more than 80

words write about your opinion about the statement “Married women should not go to work”

- Prepare the next lesson

with it .A: why?B: In my opinion ,it’s unfair for women. If they don’t go to work ,they have to stay at home all the time .It’s too boring to be housewives all their lives.

-Listen and copy

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

309

Page 310: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 92 nd period Date : 03/ 4/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: Women SocietyLesson 15ListeningTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students should know how to listen to give some information about women and the role of them in society2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: Students learn about role of women in modern life- Language:- New words: Words related to society, women3. Skills: -Extensive Listening : Multiple-choice questions

-Passage comprehensionII. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aid: Pictures ,textbook.... IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up : (4 minutes)- Ask students look at the pictures and have a comparison ?- Let students look at the picture and describe and answer some questions:1,Where do the women come

- Listen and answer- Work in pairs and each and answer1.from a village in Africa2,they are working and taking care of

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

310

Page 311: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngfrom?2,What are they doing?3,do they have happy life? why do you know?- Listen and give markPre-listening : (6 minutes)

- Let students answer the following question

- Is the life of a city women easier than that of a village woman nowadays ?What is your point of view? Why?

While-listening: (24 minutes)Task 1: You will hear a passage abut women and their roles in society.Listen to the passage and choose the best answer to complete each sentences- Listen to each pair- Let students read some sentences given and explain some new words if necessary- Read or let students listen first- Give more information if students wonder or not clear- Let students listen the second time- Check their listening- Let students listen the third time and let them choose the best answer- Observe the class and listen to each group’s feedbacksTask 2: Ask students to listen again and answer the questions

their children3,......

- Work in pairs

-Answer the question

- After three times of listening, each group gives their answers

- Read quickly and discuss in pairs or groups to find the answers which can be listened before- Can guess what will be heard again- Work in groups and give answer1B ,2C ,3C,4A,5B

- Listen again (1-2 times)- Discuss give correct answer1,40%2,they earn nothing for doing their

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

311

Page 312: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Let students read the questions first and quickly- work in pairs- Let students listen again 3 times and ask them to discuss in groups to answer the questions- Listen to each group and remark

After-listening: (10 minutes)- Have students sit in groups and compare a typical working day of your mother or your sister with that of an African village woman - Listen and remarkHomework: (2 minutes)- Ask students to write about 100- 150 words what your sister or your mother’s daily activities.

domestic work3,they produce more than half of the food4,80%5,at 4.45 am6,at 9.30 pm

- Work in groups- Other groups listen and write down some information and then repeat

- Listen and copy in their notebooks

The 93 rd period Date : 05/ 4/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: Women SocietyUnit 15WritingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives: Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

312

Page 313: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng1. Educational aim: Students know how to describe a chart2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: Students could write a report to describe information from a statistics of the activities and the time that women do every week- Language: Words used in a chart3. Skills: Describing a chartII. Method: Interagrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Some models of chart, real information in lifeIV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up : (4 minutes)

- Ask students to name the activities and the time that women often do every day

- Let students work in group

Pre-writing: (10 minutes)Task 1- Let students go through the questions give in the book ‘Look at the chart and answer the questions -Go around and help if necessary

- Listen and explain some new words and useful expressions if they do not know+the chart shows/presents/illustrates....+As can be seen from the chart+According to the chart+In general/generally

- Observe and work in pairs to answer- The answers can be various

- Continue working in pairs-- Each pair ask and answer

- Listen and write down

- Listen to the teacher

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

313

Page 314: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngspeakingwhile-writing: (20 minutes)Task 2- Ask students to do certain things- It means we use short information but it’s real- Ask students to read the model of chart first- Ask students to describe some information in a chart- Ask 2 or 3 students who may be good at English to write on the board- Let students change their report and practise speaking about the person they’ve written- Listen and remarkPost-writing: (10 minutes)- Let students work in group to write a report about someone and other groups- Read and write a short paragraph- Listen and remark

Homework: (2 minutes)- Do the writing part, Unit 15, workbook

- Read quickly themselves

- Read the form quickly and find some new words if it has- Listen and repeat, then write down in notebooks- Check among groups- Change among groups

- Work in groups and write a report- One student of one group reads aloud a report- Discuss and correct mistakes themselves

- Listen and copy

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

314

Page 315: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 94 th period Date : 07/ 4/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: Women in SocietyUnit 15Language FocusTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students know how to spell the rising

tune in a sentence2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: Students learn the use of phrasal verbs- Language:- New words: Words related to topic3. Skills: - Pronunciation: The rising tune- Grammar: - Phrasal verbsII. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: textbook, picture .....IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Notes

I. Pronunciation(10 munites)- Help students how to read correctly with the rising tune b. Practice:- Read the sentences first: clearly, correctly- Listen and correct their

- Read aloud- Listen and repeat from 2-3 times

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

315

Page 316: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

pronunciation if it’s needed-Explain to read the rising tune in Yes-No questions and sentence stress- Let students read the sentences and work in groups

- Listen and remark each group

II. Grammar: (34munites)Phrasal verbs- Show students to list out as many phrasal verbs you have learnt as possible just in one munites-Let students work in pairs

* Exercise 1: Let students read all the answers and work in groups to choose tone of the following verbs(in the correct form)+ the correct preposition to complete the sentences-Go around and help if necessary

- Listen and remark

Exercise 2 : -Introduce Exercise 3 to students and explain how to do it- Ask students to do it

-Ask students to fill each of the

- Some of them stand and read words aloud

-Listen to the teacher

- Read the sentences in chorus aloud

- Listen and copy-List some phrasal verbs : fill in ;turn on; go over ;look at ;make up. Look after ....- Read and do the exercise

- Work in their own and compare each other- One or two students give the correct form of phrasal verbs on the board- Keys:1,glanced at 2,invited to3,listen to 4,throw...at5,staring at 6,speaking to7,wrote to 8,point...at

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

316

Page 317: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

blanks with an appropriate preposition if necessary--Let them work individually- Walk round and help them- Check, correct mistakes , give reasons and mark

Homework: (2 minutes)- Remind of phrasal verbs- Let them do exercises in Workbook

- Work themselves and each student reads sentences- Other students listen and remark each other- Keys: 1,for 2,for 3,to 4,for5,about 6,x 7,about 8,x 9,for 10,for

- Listen and copy

The 95 th period Date : 09/ 4/ 2009Grade 12 Theme: Correct the test

I. Objectives: After this correction students will be clearer about the test they have just done. And have to know how to try their best for the next test.II. Method: Integrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: board, the test paper, key for the testIV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Notes

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

317

Page 318: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Greeting- Ask students some questions on the previous test- Tell the aim of the period: correct the testI/ Pick out the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently : (0.75points ) (5 minutes) - Repeat the questions- Get students to read the passage again carefully- Call some students to read out their answers, and the others give remarks if it is correct or not.- Finally read the keys out aloudII/ Pick out the word that has the stress differently from that of the other words. (0.50points ) (5 minutes)- Repeat the questions- Get students to read the passage again carefully- Call some students to read out their answers, and the others give remarks if it is correct or not.- Finally read the keys out aloudIII/ Choose the best answer. (6.25points) (15 minutes) - Repeat the questions- Get student to read the test again carefully- Call some students to read out their answers, and the

- Greeting- Listen and understand the task- Get ready for the lesson

- Look at their paper- Compare the resutls with the others- Get the correct answers from the keys

- Look at their paper- Compare the resutls with the others- Get the correct answers from the keys

- Look at their paper- Compare the results with the others- Get the correct answers from the

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

318

Page 319: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngothers give remarks if it is correct or not- Finally read the keys out aloudIV/ Read the passage and choose the best answer. ( 1.25 points) : (5 minutes) - Repeat the questions- Show the passage again several times- Get students toread the passage again carefully- Call some students to write their answers on the board, and the others give remarks if it is correct or not- Finally read the keys out aloudV/ Complete the passage, using the correct words : (1.25 points) minutes)- Repeat the questions- Get student to read the test again carefully- Call some students to read out their answers, and the others give remarks if it is correct or not- Finally read the keys out aloud

Homework: (5 minutes)Ask students to prepare Unit 16: THE ASSOCIATION OF SOUTHEAST ASIAN NATIONS at home

keys

- Look at the writing again and compare it with the others- Correct the wrong sentences base on the key

- Look at their paper- Compare the results with the others- Get the correct answers from the keys

- Prepare Unit 16: THE ASSOCIATION OF SOUTHEAST ASIAN NATIONS at home

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

319

Page 320: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Unit 16: THE ASSOCIATION OF SOUTHEAST ASIAN NATIONSThe 96 th period Date : 11/ 4/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: The Association Of Southeast Asian NationsUnit 16ReadingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students can read and know about

ASEAN and make questions and answer them well

2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: Students could understand and use the new words through speaking, asking and answering- Language:- New words: Words relate to ASEAN3. Skills: -Reading for general or specific information

-Guessing meaning from contextII. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Some photos of ASEAN and some information about themIV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (4 minutes)- Give the logo of ASEAN and ask students to guess the name this organization- Recheck and introduce the

- Do themselves and then work in pairs

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

320

Page 321: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

new lesson: The Association Of Southeast Asian NationsPre-reading: (7 minutes)- Ask some questions about some questions ?1,what does ASEAN stands for?2,When did Vietnam join this association?- Let students write some information about ASEAN

- Let each student stand and speak their opinions- Go around and help them if necessary

While-reading: (20 minutes)- Let students open the book and read silently while teacher reads aloud and correctly- Ask students to read themselves and write down some information- Let students work in pairs to do the task 1Task 1- Let students fill each blank with a suitable work

-Ask students to work individually then in pairs- Walk around the class to help student when necessary-Corrects students’ pronunciation if necessary- Check and give suggestionsTask 2- Let students read all sentences and explain some new words if

- Listen to the teacher

-Discuss and give correct answer1,ASEAN stands for the Association of Southeast Asian Nations2,In 1995

-Work in pairs to discuss to fill with suitable words

-Keys:1,justice 2,GDP3,diverse 4,integration5,accelerate 6,enterprises

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

321

Page 322: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

necessary- Listen and correct if needed-Keys: 1T ,2F ,3F ,4T, 5F ,6F

Task 3- Let students work in pairs

and read the passage again and find out the answers for these questions in the task 3

-Walk around the class to help student when necessary-Corrects students’ pronunciation if necessary

- Check and give suggestions

Post-reading: (10 minutes)-Ask students to close their books and summarise the passage ,based on the years :1967, 1995 ,1998 ,1999, 2007 ,2020-Go around and help if necessary-Check and remark

Homework (4 minutes)- Reread the passage and summarize the ASEAN (about 100 words)

- Read quickly some sentences in the text - compare with the partners

- Work in pairs and answer some questions

- Read quickly and find out the answers - Work in pairs, then one reads the sentence and the other corrects it

- Work in pairs and some of them stand and say about ASEAN- Work in groups and discuss which sentences go with the word given- Some others repeat- Copy the words

- Listen and copy

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

322

Page 323: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 97 th period Date : 13/ 4/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: The Association Of Southeast Asian NationsUnit 16speakingTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students should know how to tell the

names and the capitals of ASEAN countries

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

323

Page 324: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: Ask and answer about the names and

the capitals of ASEAN countries and the main characteristics of each nation

- Language: Words to speak about ASEAN3. Skills: -Ask and answer the information about ASEAN countriesII. Method: Integrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Photos of some famous persons or some

real information about ASEANIV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities

Notes

Warm-up: (3 minutes)- Ask students to close the book- Let students Look at the pictures and name out the countries and the capitals-Let them work in pairs

Pre-speaking: (8 minutes)Task 1- Ask students to open the book and look at the flags and match with their countries and capitals mentioned above…- Go around and listen to them

While-speaking: (20 minutes)Task 2- Let students open the books and discuss and use the

- Close the books- Work in pairs and name out the countries and the capitals- Each student speaks out their answer

- Work in pairs- Look at the picture and name them- They’re holding the pens and notebooks- Read these words and work in groups- Some students can show off these words: family; dislike; hobby; education

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

324

Page 325: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïnginformation in task 1 and the fact below to talk about some of the ASEAN countries

- Ask students to read some words given and then let them choose which countries they like to talk about- Listen and correct

Post-speaking: (10 minutes)- Ask students to work in pairs and discuss ,talk about some of the ASEAN countries- Ask one group to do the task as a model- Go around listening to some groups and help them if needed

- Ask some pairs to stand in front of the class and practise speaking

- Some groups go on speaking each other

- Listen to each group and correct or give mark if they do it well

Homework: (2-4 minutes)- Let students write about someone they admire or look forward to meeting

- Observe the picture- Work in groups with some cues given below(- Other groups go on practising speaking-

-Work in pairs and talk about some of the ASEAN countries-Keys: Malaysia has a total area of 330,252 square kilometers .Its capital is Kuala Lumpur. The population in Malaysia is 27,174,000.People speak Malay, English and Tamil in every day conversations .The Malaysians are religious. They follow Islam and Buddhism. Their currency is Ringgit

- Listen and write Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

325

Page 326: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

down in their notebooks

The 98 th period Date : 15/ 4/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: The Association Of Southeast Asian NationsUnit 16ListeningTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students should know how to ask and say

about using English and the main religion in ASEAN

2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: Students know how to give information from using English and the main religion in ASEAN- Language: - New words: Words related to ASEAN countries3. Skills: - Listening for general or specific information -Comprehension questionsII. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Some pictures of persons or some real

information about themIV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (4 minutes)- Ask students to close the book- Ask students to list the name of ASEAN countries using the English

-Work in pair and list the name of ASEAN countries- Listen to the the teacher and answer

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

326

Page 327: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngPre-listening: (8 minutes)- Let students open the books and ask and answer the question1. Which ASEAN countries are use English as a second language?- - Let students read some words they’ll listen then- Listen and check

While-listening: (20 minutes)Task 1- Let students read some sentences given and explain some new words if necessary- Read or let students listen firstHave you got anything from the dialogue between Mr Hung and his daughter Nga?- Let students listen the second time- Check their listening- Let students listen the third time and let them choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences- Observe the class and listen to each group’s feedbacks- Give more information if students wonder or not clearTask 2- Before listening, let students read quickly some questions in

the questions-Keys: Some ASEAN countries such as the Philippines, Brunei, Singapore, and Malaysia use English as second language - Read in chorus- Some students read themselves:

- Read silently the sentences given before listening- Listen the first time- No, we haven’t- Listen the second time and begin doing the task- Listen the third time and work in groups to decide the best answer- Each group asks and explains why they choose by some information they’ve listened

-Keys : 1C ,2A ,3C ,4A ,5B

- Work in groups and guess

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

327

Page 328: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngthe task 2- Let students listen the first time: Who can guess some words?- Let students listen the second time- Let student listen the last time and let them work in groups to speak out- Listen and correct their listening

Post-reading: (10 minutes)- Ask students to summarize the content of the conversation between Nga and her father-Mr Hung- Ask students to write a short passage to guess what Nga’s essay will be about- Listen to each group and correct mistakes if they’ve done

Homework: (2- 4 minutes)- Ask students to write a short passage about the content of the listening text( 70 words)

- Listen and do the task - Speak out their listening- Try to write down the answers-Key: 1,tomorrow(the next day)2,The US 3,Around 50 million4.In the Philippines5,three-Islam,Buddhism and Catholicism

- Work in groups:- Work in groups and each group has one person who says about it- May answer in different ways- Write in groups and ask someone to speak out their writing- Other groups listen and copy some information and give some questions

- Practice writing

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

328

Page 329: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

The 99 th period Date : 17/ 4/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: The Association Of Southeast Asian NationsUnit 16WritingTime: 45 minutes

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

329

Page 330: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students should know how to write a

letter of recommendation2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: Students learn to write about the places

they are familiar with- Language: Words used in writing about a significant place3. Skills: Writing about a letter of recommendationII. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: Some cues, information of someoneIV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (4 minutes)- Ask students to close the books- Look at the pictures and name out the places -Let students work in pairsPre-writing: (8 minutes)Task 1- Ask students to open their books- Introduce the students do the task 1-Let them work in groups and complete the letter with the missing sentences in the box-Go around and help-Explain some new words if necessary-Give correct answers

While-writing: (18 minutes)

- Work in pairs and match the name with the picture- Some students do matching on the board

- work in pair and do the task 1

- Key1,I would like to recommend a well-know place in Vietnam to you2,It is about 170 km from Hanoi3,The beach is an ideal place for swimmers4,People here are very friendly and hospitable5,I am sure you will have a wonderful time here in Ha long

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

330

Page 331: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Introduce to do task2 - Let students read quickly the task2David ,your pen pal ,is going to spend his summer vacation in one of the ASEAN countries. You want him to visit Vietnam .Write a letter to him recommending a significant place you are familiar with.- Explain some new words if necessary

-Give form of a recommendation letterOutline+Date+Salutation+Body.location.natural features.places to visit.food.people........+Closing+Signature- Ask some other groups to write down a paragraph using some cues below and then each student on be half of his group read aloudPost-writing: (13 minutes)- Ask students to read another’s letter- Ask some students to read loudly their letter- Listen and correct if needed

bay

- Listen to the teacher- Read silently

- Read those words and copy

- Work in pairs- Each group read their writing- Listen and work in groups- - Discuss and find out some errors if they make

- Practise writing in groups- Each member of groups reads aloud his/ her writing- Other group

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

331

Page 332: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Homework: (2 minutes)- Do the writing task in student’s workbook-Prepare the next lesson

appreciate and correct mistakes each other- Each group does the writing and read aloud

- Listen and copy

The 100 th period Date : 19/ 4/ 2009Grade 12

Theme: The Association Of Southeast Asian NationsUnit 16Language FocusTime: 45 minutes

I. Objectives:1. Educational aim: Students should pronunciate the rising –

falling tune correctly and the use of adverbial clause of time

2. Knowledge:- General knowledge: Students learn words to describe people’s background- Language: A paragraph and adverbial clause of time3. Skill: fluency in the rising –falling and use of adverbial clause of timeII. Method: Intergrated, mainly communicativeIII. Teaching aids: textbook, handout.....IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Notes

I. Pronunciation: (15 minutes)- Close the books!a. Introduce the rising-falling

- Read these sentences

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

332

Page 333: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïngtune- Let students practise pronunciating these sentences- Listen and correct the syllables students readb. Let students open the books and read aloud the words given and try to pronunciate these sentences with the rising –tune

- Listen and check for pronunciation- Ask students to listen and read after these sentencesII. Grammar: (20 minutes)adverbial clause of time-Introduce the way of using adverbial clause of time through some example

- Ask students to give some examples- Listen and remark

b. Let students practise doing exercisesExercise 1- Ask students to do exercise themselves then discuss in groups

- Listen and repeat following the teacher- Read in silent first- Some of each groups read aloud

-Listen to the teacher- Students work in pairs and give some examples- Some students repeat aloud

- Do the exercise themselves- Key:1,She will phone you as soon as she arrives in Ho Chi Minh City2,After the war was over we started rebuilding the country3,they met a lot of people while they were on holiday4,before you leave

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

333

Page 334: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Exercise 2- Ask students to supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets- Listen and remark-Keys:1,arrives 2,arrives 3,are playing4,got ,5,have finished 6,(had) graduated 7.am 8,have read

Exercise 3- Let students combine two sentences, using one as an adverbial clause of time with the given conjunction-Go around and help if necessary-Give correct answers

don’t forgot to turn off the lights5,I will stay till you get back6,We’ll come to see you whenever we are in hanoi7,there is a danger of war as long as imperialism exits8,tom sang a merry song as he walked away

- Work in groups and give the correct tense of verb and explain why they did it- Each group answer and give reasons

- Read silently and discuss in pairs, groups-Key:1,Let’s go out before it starts raining2,I’ll give you my address when I have found somewhere to live3,After he had done his homework ,he went to bed4,We’ll let you know as soon as we have made our decision

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

334

Page 335: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

Homework: (5 minutes)- Ask students to revise the use of adverbial clause of time- Practise doing exercise in the Workbook

5,I haven’t met them since I left school6,robert suddenly began to feel ill while he was doing the exams7,Kate will come back home after she has finished the last semester

- Listen and write down

The 101 st period Date : 23/ 4/ 2009Grade 12 Test yourself F

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

335

Page 336: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngI. Objectives: After this lesson, students will be able to:

- Check themselves their skills in reading, speaking, listening, writing.

- Improve their knowledge through the test yourself.II. Method: Integrated, mainly communicative.II. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, cassetteplayer, board, hand-outs…IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s activities Students’ activities NotesWarm-up: (5 minutes)- Greeting- Ask students something about the test yourself F* Have you prepared it at home?* Have you got any difficulties?

Test yourself

I. Listening(2.5 points) (10 minutes) Teacher asks Sts to read

and find new words. Teacher explains:

Asks Sts to read the statements carefully and underline key words before listening the first.

Asks Sts to finish the exercise after listening the second.

Asks Sts to listen to the tape (the third time) and then discuss in pairs about the final answer.

Goes around the class, helps Sts discuss about the answers if necessary.

Asks some Sts to give the

- Greeting- Answer teacher’s questions

Listen and dill in the blanks with the information as you hear.UNESCO stands for the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization. It was established on ………….. to encourage collaboration among nations in the areas of education, science, culture and communication. UNESCO has …………….member

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

336

Page 337: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

answers, others give feedback.

Teacher gives Sts to listen once more.

Expected answers:1. 16 November 19452. 1933. 604. teacher-training

5. heritage- Correct mistakes

II. Reading (2.5 points) (10 minutes) Teacher explains new

words/ phrases: Labor-intensive : (adj) cần nhiều nhân côngPropotion (n) tỉ lệExclude (v) ngăn chặnReserve (v) : dành riêng Asks Ss to read the passage

and then answer the questions.

Goes around the class to

nations as of 2007. the agency has its headquarter in Paris, France, and operated educational, scientific, and cultural programs and exchanges from ………. Fields offices world wide. Project sponsors by UNESCO include international science programs; literacy, technical, and ………..programs; regional and cultural history projects; and international cooperation agreements to secure the world’s cultural and natural …………… and to preserve human rights. Students read Sts listen

- Students work in pairs: reading and decide to choose the answer. Read the text then answer the questions that follow1. Which countries,

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

337

Page 338: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

get the fettle of Sts and helps them with vocabularies, the way to express if necessary.

Teacher asks a representative in some pairs to present the result in front of the class. Other pairs gives feedback

Teacher corrects in general and tells the point of marks so that Sts remark themselves.

III. Grammar(2.5 points) (8 minutes)- Recall the grammar of articals.- Giude students how to do- Give them some newwords:- Do the first as an example.- Ask students to to the exercise.Use the following verbs to complete the sentences below:

according to the passage, have low levels of females paid workers?2. In which sectors do you find the majority of working women in Southeast Asia?3. What is the percentage of women who work in the service sector in Latin America and the Caribbean? 4. On whom did women depend economically in the past?5. According to the passage, what are the two factors that give women more freedom nowadays? Suggested answering.

1. Arab countries2. In textile, toy,

shoe and electronic sectors

3. 70%4. They depend

on their husbands or fathers

5. The access to education and change in economic status.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

338

Page 339: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng HïngCatch up Cool off Fall

behindGive in Grow up Keep upSpeak up Stay on Wait upWatch out

1. He still behaves like a child. I wish he’d grow up.

2. Come to the party on Friday and …….. for the weekend.

3. I won’t be back until late. Will you ………for me?

4. He was exhausted but he still kept going. He just wouldn’t …………

5. Please don’t go so fast. I just can’t ………..

6. Could you ………….a bit? I can hardly hear you.

7. ……………! Oh dear. Didn’t you see that car coming?

8. You look hot and sticky. Come and sit in the shade and …………

9. You go on ahead and I’ll …………

10. Wait for me. I don’t want to …………..

Teacher asks Sts to discuss about the answer in pairs/ groups.

Teacher asks a representative in each group to present the result in front of the class. Other group gives feedback

Teacher corrects in general and tells the point of marks so that Sts remark themselves.

Students work in pairs/ groups.Suggested answers:

1. grow up2. stay on3. wait up4. give in5. catch up6. speak up7. Watch out8. cool off9. keep up10. fall

behind Other Sts give feedback

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

339

Page 340: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng- Call the to to on board.- Go round the class to control the set’s activities

- Correct mistakes

IV. Writing(2.5 points) (7 minutes)- Giude students how to write- Give students some models and structures to writes.In about 120 words, write about the changes in women’s role in the family in comparison with that 50 years ago.The following cues might be useful to you. Education Social activities Work Economic dependence Number of children

Domestic chores- Ask students to write.- Call the to to on board.- Go round the class to control the students’ activities- Correct mistakesHomework (5 minutes)- Ask students: + to study all the lessons again. + to prepare to review all the knowledge of grade 12.

- Listen to the teacher carefully.- Discuss in groups to get the information and write the outline.- Each person use the outline to write a short paragraph.- Peer correction.- Underline the mistakes - Assess on the content: 1 mark, use correct / exact words / sentence structure : 1 mark, coherence : 0.5 mark

- Compare the results with the other groups.- Correct mistakes

+ to study all the lessons again.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

340

Page 341: Tieng Anh 12 Cb Tron Bo

Gi¸o viªn: Giang L¬ng Hïng

+ to prepare to review all the knowledge of grade 12.

Lesson plans of grade 12 Nguyen trai upper secondary school

341